Programming Terminal

Operating Instructions
Model No. KXF-9Q4C

Programming Manual
(PT Tools)

PT200-G

Production No.

Doc. No. 9Q4C-E-PMDA-0000

 “Use of this system:
This system is designed for the purpose of efficiently creating and managing the production data to be used for
placing electric and electronic components.
This system shall be used for this purpose only.

It shall not be used for any other purpose.”

“Operation of the machine:

The machine shall be operated by professional, specially trained operators.

It shall not be operated by non-professional, not specially trained operators.

For the training coursed you, make contact with FA Division, PFAE or PIEL.”

WARNING
DO NOT ALLOW ANY PERSON WHO HAS NOT RECEIVED SPECIAL TRAINING
TO OPERATE THE MACHINE.

The machine may be operated improperly and injure you.

Either carry out training by yourself, or consult the manufacturer.

M11E

Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.

Machine was manufactured by: Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd.

FA Division
441-13, Nagahasu, Tateishi-machi, Tosu-city, Saga, Japan
Phone number: 81-942-84-2644
Fax number: 81-942-84-2636

For Service and Supply of Spares in Europe

you may contact Panasonic Europe:

Continental Europe
PFAE
Panasonic Factory Automation Europe
Winsbergring 15
22525 Hamburg Germany
Phone number: 0049-(0)40-85386-321
Fax number: 0049-(0)40-85386-332

United Kingdom
PIEL
Panasonic Industrial Europe (U.K.)
Panasonic House,Willoughby Road
Bracknell, Berks. RG12 8 FP
Phone number: 0044-(0)1344-853267
Fax number: 0044-(0)1344-425970

Year:2002

unter
o CM402 L
9Q4C-E-PMD00-A01-00 1
 T
PT200 User License Agreement
z This is the Agreement between the users and KME related to Programming Terminal PT200-G. The
product includes the software of the computer, relative media, (CD ROM or FD, etc.), and the
printed materials as instruction manuals.
We regard user’s installation or use of this software as their approval of the restriction based on the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. If you have any disagreement with it, please return the
software to the sales agent where you got it, before use.
The software is reserved by the Copyright Laws, International Copy Right Treaties, etc.
The software is to be permitted, but its right is not transferred to others.

z License Grant and Limitations

The users are permitted to get the following rights in this Agreement.
1. The users can install the software to the only specified computer and use.
For installing it to several computers, it is necessary to get the same number of licenses as them.
2. The software cannot be used for several computers on the same network server at the same
time.
For using it for several computers, it is necessary to get the same number of licenses as them.
3. Reverse engineering, deassembling, and decompiling of the software shall not be unavailable.
4. This Agreement also includes the license of other company’s software which is constructed in this
software.
5. The software cannot be divided for using for other computer.
6. The software is to be updated with older version one simultaneously and also used together. The
License of the software is effective in older version software, too.
(The new version software itself does not constitute the granting of the license.)
7. The software cannot be lent nor rented.
8. The License of the software shall not be to apply for lending the instruction manuals.

T
Registered trademarks and/or trademarks
Registered trademarks and/or trademarks mentioned herein are as follows.
z Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows 2000 are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
z The proper product name of Windows NT is Microsoft® Windows NT® operating system.
z The proper product name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft® Windows® 2000 operating system.
z The proper product name of Windows is Microsoft® Windows® operating system.
z Other product and company names mentioned herein may be either registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective companies.

2 9Q4C-E-PMD00-A01-00
 Thank you very much for purchasing PT200-G, the programming terminal.
Before placing the machine in service, be sure to read this instruction manual for proper
usage.
After that, store it carefully, and read it if necessary.

9Q4C-E-PMD00-A01-00 3
 Organization of manuals

T
Organization of instruction manuals
This machine is accompanied with the following two manuals. Use the appropriate one according
to the purpose.

Manual type Explanation

Describes the log-on procedure, file management function, production

Programming Manual machine monitoring function, and the like.
(PT Tools) “1. PT200 OUTLINE” describes the whole outline of PT200 including
editors and line converter.

Programming Manual Describes the production data creating procedure by machine.

(Editors) The contents vary with the model(s) you purchased.

Programming Manual Describes how to create the production data from CAD data, distribute data
(Line Converter) on the whole line, simulate the created data, and the like.

4 9Q4C-E-PMD00-A01-00
 About the wording in context

T
HOW TO READ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Description depends on the page; however, it is constructed basically as follows.

1 2

Explanation
? Title
@ Operation step number
A Actual operation
B Supplementary description
T
Symbols used in this manual
In this manual, the following symbols are used for description.

: This shows the part to be clicked on.

(The number going with this mark indicates the order of clicking.)

: This shows the part to be double-clicked on.

: This means moving a pointer with the left mouse button held
down, and laying it on the other folder, then releasing the button
(Drag & Drop).
733C-EPt-Fi-049

: Shows a reference item.

9Q4C-E-PMD00-A01-00 5
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS....................................... 1
1. PT200 OUTLINE.............................................. 1-1
1.1 Ability of PT200.....................................................................................................1-2
1.2 PT200-Support Models.........................................................................................1-5
1.2.1 PT200-Support Models ....................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2 Supporting Modules ............................................................................................................................ 1-5

1.3 PT200 System Configuration................................................................................1-6

1.3.1 About PT Shell .................................................................................................................................... 1-7

1.4 Startup and Exit ....................................................................................................1-8

1.4.1 Logon .................................................................................................................................................. 1-8
1.4.2 Exit .................................................................................................................................................... 1-10

1.5 Common Operations...........................................................................................1-11

1.5.1 Basic Operations of Mouse and Keyboard ....................................................................................... 1-11
1.5.2 Function-Selecting Operations ......................................................................................................... 1-11
1.5.3 Input Operations in Edit .................................................................................................................... 1-12

2. FILER............................................................... 2-1
2.1 Outline of Filer ......................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Starting the Filer.................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.2 Main Screen of Filer............................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.3 Filer Display Functions........................................................................................................................ 2-6

2.2 Creating a New PT File.......................................................................................2-13

2.2.1 Method of Newly Creation ................................................................................................................ 2-13
2.2.2 Creating a Group Folder ................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.2.3 Creating a Lot ................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.2.4 Starting the Editor ............................................................................................................................. 2-16

2.3 File Operations (Copy into PT, Changing a Name, Deleting).............................2-17

2.3.1 Copying a File in PT.......................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.3.2 Changing a PT File Name................................................................................................................. 2-21
2.3.3 Deleting a File ................................................................................................................................... 2-23

2.4 Registering to List for Machine ...........................................................................2-24

2.5 Transferring Data between PT and Machines ....................................................2-26
2.5.1 Transferring Data by Communication (Download, Upload) .............................................................. 2-26
2.5.2 Transferring Data via FD................................................................................................................... 2-28

2.6 Creating a Revision ............................................................................................2-31

2.7 Sharing Nozzle Changer Data ............................................................................2-34
2.7.1 About Nozzle Changer Data ............................................................................................................. 2-34
2.7.2 Screen of Nozzle Changer Data Sharing.......................................................................................... 2-34
2.7.3 Sharing Nozzle Changer Data .......................................................................................................... 2-35

2.8 Importing/Exporting Data ....................................................................................2-40

6 9Q4C-E-PMD00-A02-00
 2.8.1 Conditions for Import/Export............................................................................................................. 2-40
2.8.2 Import................................................................................................................................................ 2-40
2.8.3 Export ............................................................................................................................................... 2-42
2.8.4 Importing Data of Old Machines (PT-Nonsupport Models) .............................................................. 2-44

3. VARIOUS INFORMATION DISPLAY ..............3-1

3.1 Line Monitor ......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1 Starting the Line Monitor .................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Status of Monitor and Machine........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 Changing Display Types..................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.4 Switching the Logic Mode................................................................................................................... 3-4

3.2 Event Viewer........................................................................................................ 3-5

3.2.1 Starting the Event Viewer ................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Main Screen of Event Viewer ............................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.3 Changing Display Types..................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.4 Setups................................................................................................................................................. 3-8

3.3 Production Information Viewer........................................................................... 3-10

3.3.1 Starting the Production Information Viewer ...................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.2 Main Screen of Production Information Viewer ................................................................................ 3-11

4. PARTS LIBRARY ............................................4-1

4.1 How to Use the Parts Library ............................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1 Starting the Parts Library Editor ......................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Parts Library List Window................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Using the Search Function ................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.1.4 Selecting from List .............................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.1.5 Selecting from Histories...................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.1.6 Selecting from Favorites ..................................................................................................................... 4-8

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor) ................................................. 4-10

4.2.1 Parts Library Registering Procedures............................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.2 Starting the Parts Library Editor ....................................................................................................... 4-11
4.2.3 Parts Library Edit Windows .............................................................................................................. 4-12
4.2.4 Loading the Standard Chip Data ...................................................................................................... 4-14
4.2.5 Editing from Parts Name to Notes .................................................................................................... 4-16
4.2.6 Editing the Feeder Information ......................................................................................................... 4-17
4.2.7 Editing the Chip Information ............................................................................................................. 4-20
4.2.8 Editing the QFP Extended Data ....................................................................................................... 4-22
4.2.9 Editing the BGA Extended Data ....................................................................................................... 4-25
4.2.10 Inputting the Commercial Parts Data.............................................................................................. 4-28
4.2.11 Editing the Machine Data ............................................................................................................... 4-29
4.2.12 Editing the Tray Data ...................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.2.13 Exit and Save.................................................................................................................................. 4-37

5. VIRTUAL LINE.................................................5-1
5.1 Virtual Line Setup................................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.1 Starting the Virtual Line Setup............................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.2 Virtual Line Setting Window................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.3 Virtual Line Setting Procedure............................................................................................................ 5-3

9Q4C-E-PMD00-A02-00 7
 5.2 Virtual Filer............................................................................................................5-7
5.2.1 Starting the Virtual Filer ...................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.2 Virtual Filer Function List (Compared with Filer) ................................................................................ 5-8
5.2.3 Virtual Filer Specific Functions ........................................................................................................... 5-9

5.3 Creating the Virtual Data ....................................................................................5-11

5.4 Simulation ...........................................................................................................5-12

6. HELP ............................................................... 6-1

6.1 Outline of Version Display ....................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Starting the Version Display ............................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Screen of Version Display................................................................................................................... 6-2

6.2 HTML Help (Chip Recognition Information)..........................................................6-4

6.2.1 Starting the HTML Help ...................................................................................................................... 6-4

7. MAINTENANCE .............................................. 7-1

7.1 Unlock ...................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 About Unlock....................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Unlock Procedure ............................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.2 CM20X/301 System Installer ................................................................................7-3

7.2.1 About Installer ..................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Installation Procedure ......................................................................................................................... 7-3

7.3 PT200 Conversion Tool ........................................................................................7-4

7.3.1 About PT200 Conversion Tool............................................................................................................ 7-4
7.3.2 Conversion Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 7-5

8. USER MANAGEMENT .................................... 8-1

8.1 Before Starting the User Managers ......................................................................8-2
8.2 NT User Manager .................................................................................................8-3
8.2.1 Starting the NT User Manager ............................................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.2 Setting the NT User Manager ............................................................................................................. 8-3

8.3 PT User Manager .................................................................................................8-4

8.3.1 Starting the PT User Manager ............................................................................................................ 8-4
8.3.2 Main Screen of PT User Manager ...................................................................................................... 8-4
8.3.3 Adding the Users ................................................................................................................................ 8-5
8.3.4 Deleting the Users .............................................................................................................................. 8-6

9. PROVIEWER ................................................... 9-1

9.1 Functions of ProViewer and Supporting Machines ...............................................9-2
9.1.1 Functions of ProViewer....................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.2 Supporting Machines .......................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.2 Configuration Window...........................................................................................9-3

9.2.1 Starting the Configuration Settings ..................................................................................................... 9-3
8 9Q4C-E-PMD00-A02-00
 9.2.2 Configuration Window ........................................................................................................................ 9-4
9.2.3 ASCII File Output................................................................................................................................ 9-5
9.2.4 Directory-Selecting Window ............................................................................................................... 9-6
9.2.5 Data Hold Days................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.6 Lot Kind............................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.7 Lot Definition....................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.2.8 Delete Time ...................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.2.9 Generation Management.................................................................................................................. 9-10
9.2.10 Shutdown........................................................................................................................................ 9-11

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications .............................................................................. 9-12

9.3.1 Outline of File Specifications ............................................................................................................ 9-12
9.3.2 Timing of Generation and Deletion, and Naming Criteria ................................................................ 9-13
9.3.3 Directory Hierarchy / File Output ...................................................................................................... 9-14
9.3.4 Common Record Specifications ....................................................................................................... 9-15
9.3.5 Record Specifications by File ........................................................................................................... 9-16

9.4 Event List ........................................................................................................... 9-55

9.4.1 PT Event List .................................................................................................................................... 9-55
9.4.2 Machine Event List ........................................................................................................................... 9-64

9.5 FAQ.................................................................................................................... 9-88

10. INSTALLATION ...........................................10-1

10.1 Installation Procedure .......................................................................................10-2

INDEX

9Q4C-E-PMD00-A02-00 9
= MEMO =

10 9Q4C-E-PMD00-A02-00
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Be sure to observe

The precautions that shall be observed in order to prevent an injury to the user or the
other persons, and damage to property, are described as follows.

TThe degrees of danger or injury, resulting from incorrect usage owing to failure to read an
indication, are classified and described as follows.

This indication refers to a situation which is considered that there is a

WARNING possibility of death or serious injury.
This indication refers to a situation which is considered that there is a
CAUTION possibility of only injury or physical damage.

TThe matters that shall be observed are classified by the symbols as shown below, and
described.
(The following are the examples of the symbols.)

This kind of symbol indicates an action that must not be carried out.

This kind of symbol indicates an action that must be carried out.

NOTICE
This part describes the precautions in using PT200.
As for the personal computer, monitor, etc., observe the precautions described in
each manual.
When operating the machine, see its “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” in the Operating
and the Maintenance manual.

9Q4C-E-XXD00-A03-00 Page 1
 WARNING

Page 2 9Q4C-E-XXD00-A03-00
 CAUTION

9Q4C-E-XXD00-A03-00 Page 3
 TTERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL
The terms used in this manual are used as the following meanings.
‚ This part describes only the terms frequently used.
‚ This manual is intended for those who are familiar with the basic operations of Windows, so it
does not explain computer terms (“folder,” “application,” etc.). For information about those terms,
refer to the commercially available glossary.

z Machine

Line
Indicates the production line that actually produces boards. The line on PT indicates the
production line that consists of only the PT-support machines.
Virtual line
While the line is an actual production line, the virtual line is the line that users can set by
themselves. You can simulate the production tact in changing and introducing the line, create the
production data for another plant’s line, and the like.
Module
PT defines that the module is the one composed of the coupled modular-support chip mounters.
You can manage and create data for each module.
Modular machine (Modular-type, Modular-support)
Indicates the machine that can be managed as module after coupled.
Machine
Indicates the production machine body.

Example of line configuration

Module

9Q4C-017E

Line
Line

Page 4 9Q4C-E-XXD00-A04-00
 z Data file

Group (Group folder)

This is a folder used to manage data. To manage data for each production board type, such as a
portable telephone group and an electronic device group, create the group folders.
Lot (Lot folder)
This is a folder used to manage the data for each production board. Lot includes all the data
(PT files) of the machine or module on the production line.
∗ The production data of the machine that is not on the line will not be entered.
PT file (PT file name)
Indicates the production data of the machine or module managed by PT.
Production data
Indicates a data used to actually produce boards. This is the data for each machine or module
that composes the line.
(For the contents of the production data, such as the board and the block data, refer to the
“Programming Manual (Editors).”)
CAD data
Indicates the board (mount coordinates) design data created by CAD. PT can convert and import
this data.

Example of data configuration

9Q4C-046E

9Q4C-E-XXD00-A04-00 Page 5
 z Function

Tool
This is an application composing PT.
When PT is started up, the menu box contains “Help,” “Setup,” “Maintenance,” and “End” in
addition to “Tool;” however, this manual refers to the functions in “Help,” “Setup,” and
“Maintenance” as tools.
Library
This is an in-depth data aggregate prepared beforehand. Users can add and edit the data.
PT has various kinds of libraries, such as for parts, for nozzles, and for feeders; you can input an
in-depth data just by selecting data from the library at the data input screen.
Filer
This is an application used to manage folders and data files. In addition to the PT filer, the data
converter adopts the filer style.
Editor
This is an application used to create the production data.
Line converter
This is a converter used to create the production data from such as CAD data. It has not only the
data conversion function but also the edit (editor) and the simulation function.
Viewer
This is an application used to monitor the operations and errors of PT or machines, an operational
status, and the like.
User mode
Sets an authority for the PT tools. There are two modes as follows.
Operator mode
Only the tools that monitor the line (viewer) can be used. Data cannot be created and managed.
Engineer mode
All the tools for PT data creation and management can be used.
∗ No authority for the PT system
Import
Means importing data from the external or other tools.
Export
Means exporting data to the external or other tools.

Page 6 9Q4C-E-XXD00-A04-00
1.

1. PT200 OUTLINE

PT200 is a programming terminal used to create and edit the production data, having
the following features.
z The Windows-based user interface provides an easy operation.
z Lets you create the production data without a stop of production line.
z Lets you check such as a machine operational status on-line.
z Fully supports the modular machines. Automatically distributes the mount data to more than one modular
machine.
z Lets you convert such as a CAD data of basic design into the production data.
z Virtual line lets you simulate the production efficiency of the future line or that in the change of the line
configuration∗.

∗ Some knowledge of the data format, and the knowledge and experience of the production data are
required.

9Q4C-E-PMD01-A00-00 Page 1-1

1.1 Ability of PT200
1.

1.1 Ability of PT200

Describes what PT200 can mainly do.

T
Creating various kinds of production data

9Q4C-013E

T
Monitoring the line (machines)
On-line status Production status Machine status

9Q4C-EPt-Li-006

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-004

9Q4C-EPt-Pv-004

9Q4C-014E

Page 1-2 9Q4C-E-PMD01-A01-00

 1.1 Ability of PT200

T
Converting the external data, such as CAD data
CAD data Other company’s data PT-nonsupport machine data PT file, etc.

9Q4C-015E
9Q4C-031E 9Q4C-032E 9Q4C-033E

<Line converter>

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-025

9Q4C-EPt-LcIn-006 9Q4C-EPt-LcEx-006
Import Data edit and simulation Export

PT file Machine format data Other format data

9Q4C-015E
9Q4C-033E 9Q4C-031E

9Q4C-E-PMD01-A01-00 Page 1-3

1.1 Ability of PT200

T
Virtual line creation and data simulation
In the following cases, you can set the virtual line to create and simulate data.

Wishing to simulate what will become of the production tact if changing the line configuration.

Wishing to simulate what will become of the production tact if purchasing a new line.

Wishing to simulate what will become of the production tact if producing on another line.

Wishing to create the production data to produce at another plant.
∗ Only the machines of KME standard specification or the ones composing the existing line can
be set on the virtual line.
Feeding devices (feeder, tray) and special specifications (input range, etc.) are not supported.

Actual line Virtual line

9Q4C-018E 9Q4C-017E

Setting the virtual line

By the virtual filer

Creating groups and lots

By the modular editor

Creating the production data

Importing to the line converter

Apportioning the production data

Simulation

Tact time in actual production

Compare

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-025

Page 1-4 9Q4C-E-PMD01-A01-00

 1.2 PT200-Support Models

1.2 PT200-Support Models

1.2.1 PT200-Support Models
(As of August, 2002)
PT200 supports the following machines.

Screen printer: SP22, SP28

Bond dispenser: BD30
Modular-type chip mounter: CM201, CM202, CM301, CM402
High-speed chip mounter: CM88
Multi-functional chip mounter: CM20F, CM100, CM120

1.2.2 Supporting Modules

PT200 can handle several modular-type chip mounters like one machine as a module.

E.g. 1

Module

Line
9Q4C-005E

E.g. 2: More than one module can also be set.

Module 1 Module 2

Line
9Q4C-006E

∗ A module accommodates the machines of up to 16 tables.

For CM202 (four tables), up to four CM202s can be handled as one module.

9Q4C-E-PMD01-A01-00 Page 1-5

1.3 PT200 System Configuration

1.3 PT200 System Configuration

PT, which is the software that runs under Windows NT, is composed of several tools
(applications) as follows.

9Q4C-034E

∗1 : Only the display for confirmation is provided. Setup and changing are not allowed.
∗2 : Serviceman mode is not available.
∗3 : This tool is described in “Programming Manual (Editors).”
∗4 : This tool is described in “Programming Manual (Line Converter).”

Page 1-6 9Q4C-E-PMD01-A01-00

 1.3 PT200 System Configuration

1.3.1 About PT Shell

When you start up the computer and log onto PT, the PT-shell menu box is displayed at the left
of screen.
Clicking an icon in this menu box launches the corresponding tool.

T
PT-shell screen
1

3
9Q4C-EPt-Sh-001

No. Name Explanation

Mode and user name display area Current mode and user name are displayed.
Each application is displayed by group.
Menu box
Click a group, and then double-click an icon to launch it.
Status bar Explanation of the selected icon is displayed.

T
About the tools used simultaneously
Each tool is independent software, so more than one tool can be used simultaneously.
Pressing [Ctrl] + [Tab] keys toggles each tool.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-005

∗ If too many tools are launched, the processing speed decreases, causing trouble. Take care not
to leave unused tools launched.

9Q4C-E-PMD01-A01-00 Page 1-7

1.4 Startup and Exit

1.4 Startup and Exit

When you turn on the power of the PT-installed computer, the following screen is displayed after
it started up.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-002

To operate PT, you need to log onto the system.

Read the following procedure.

NOTICE
When the computer is started up, the Windows NT logon screen is displayed; for the
PT200 system, however, Windows NT logon means PT200 logon.
Therefore, logging on at the Windows NT logon screen starts up PT200.

1.4.1 Logon

NOTICE
When PT is shipped, the following user name and password have been registered
for the PT Engineer mode.
User name: create
Password: create
When you start up PT for the first time, be sure to use this user name and password
to log on.
The above user has an administrator authority.
To register the other users, log on to PT with [create]; then, register them at [NT User
manager] and [PT User manager] from [Setup].
( 8. USER MANAGEMENT)

Page 1-8 9Q4C-E-PMD01-A01-00

 1.4 Startup and Exit

1. Press [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Delete].

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-003

2. Type the user name.

∗ The user name logged on last time has
already been displayed. If wishing to change
the user, type the name.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-009

3. Type the password and click [OK].

• The PT-shell screen is displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-009

∗ The PT shell configuration varies according to

the mode. (Left: Engineer mode)

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-001

9Q4C-E-PMD01-A01-00 Page 1-9

1.4 Startup and Exit

1.4.2 Exit
1. Click [End].

• <PT System ShutDown> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Hp-001

2. Choose one of the three alternatives,

then click [Yes].

• You can exit PT shell, shut down or restart the

computer.

733C-EPt-Sh-008

T
About the differences among the exit methods

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-004

A) ‘Shutdown System’
Turns off the power to the computer.
After a while, the screen as shown above is displayed; then, turn off the power switch of the
computer.

B) ‘Restart System’
Restarts the computer, then displays the logon screen.

C) ‘Close all program and log on as different user.’

Exits the PT system, then returns to the logon screen.
To change the user (mode) to log on, choose this.

Page 1-10 9Q4C-E-PMD01-A01-00

 1.5 Common Operations

1.5 Common Operations

Describes the operations common to the “Programming Manual (PT Tools),” “Programming
Manual (Editors),” and “Programming Manual (Line Converter).”

1.5.1 Basic Operations of Mouse and Keyboard

The mouse and keyboard operations are basically the same as Windows. Except typing values
and characters, all operations can be done with a mouse.

1.5.2 Function-Selecting Operations

There are several methods for function selection, though they vary with the function to be
chosen.
E.g.: For the editor, there are four methods as follows.

1. Open the submenu from the menu on the menu bar, then click the desired function.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-001

2. Click the desired icon on the tool bar.

∗ For only the (frequently-used) functions with their icons
∗ The tool bar cannot be edited.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-002

3. Depress the right mouse button to display the submenu, then click the desired
function.
∗ For only the functions used frequently

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-003

4. Double-click the desired data.

∗ For only the specific functions

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-119

9Q4C-E-PMD01-A01-00 Page 1-11

1.5 Common Operations

1.5.3 Input Operations in Edit

Describes how to operate the input windows of editors and in editing the library.
There are seven types of input windows as follows.

6
1

2 5
4
3

9Q4C-EPt-Pl-001

(E.g.: Parts library editor window)

No. Type Explanation

? White window Type values and characters with a keyboard.
@ Clicking a pull-down button increases a value by one, and
White window with
decreases it by one.
• You can also type with a keyboard.
A White window with Depressing a pull-down button displays some alternatives; click to
choose one of them.
• When a pointer changes to on the window, you can type also with a
keyboard.
B White window with Depressing a pull-down button displays some alternatives or search
window based on the library.
When some alternatives are displayed, double-click to choose one of them.
When the search window is displayed, set the conditions and search for an
alternative, and then double-click to choose it.
• You can also type with a keyboard.
C Light-yellow window with The input method is the same as B. However, you cannot type with a
keyboard.
D Light-yellow window This is for reference. Nothing can be typed in.
E Gray characters, , or Typing and selection are disabled.
window

Page 1-12 9Q4C-E-PMD01-A01-00

2.

2. FILER

Filer, which is one of the applications composing PT, collectively manages the
production data and production control information of such as screen printer and chip
mounter through the network.

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A00-00 Page 2-1

2.1 Outline of Filer
2.

2.1 Outline of Filer

2.1.1 Starting the Filer
To start the filer, double-click “Filer” icon from [Tool] in the menu box.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-001

2.1.2 Main Screen of Filer

When you start the filer, the screen that was displayed just before you exit the filer last time is
displayed.
You can variously change how the folder and the file information area look.
( 2.1.3 Filer Display Functions)

3 4

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-005

① Menu bar
② Tool bar
③ Folder information area
④ File information area
⑤ Event display area

Page 2-2 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00

 2.1 Outline of Filer

① Menu bar
When you place a pointer on a menu name and click it, the command menu opens.
Then click to choose a command. (Some menus contain sub menus.)

TMenu structure
As for File, Edit, and Tool, executable menus will be active and inexecutable ones will be
displayed in gray, depending on what is selected in the folder information area.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-005

1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

No. Sub menu Function

1) This is used to create or copy data (folder), change the name, import/export
data files, and the others.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-010

2) This is used to start the editor and the nozzle changer data sharing.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-009

3) You can change the display of file information area, and view the details of
the lot data and production data in each lot.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-008

4) You can send/receive data to/from machines, register data to the list for
machine, set modules, and the others.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-007

5) This explains the operating procedure and the details.

When you want to know the operating procedure, etc., refer to it.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-006

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00 Page 2-3

2.1 Outline of Filer

② Tool bar
The commands to be used frequently are represented by icons. Executable menus will be active
and inexecutable ones will be displayed in gray, depending on what is selected in the folder
information area. To execute a command, place a pointer on the icon and click it.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-011

(Back) : Back to the immediately (Editor) : Start editor

9Q4C-F053 9Q4C-F009
preceding screen
(Next) : Forward to the next screen (FD Copy) : Copy data from PT to FD
9Q4C-F054 9Q4C-F010

(LOT) : Create lot (HD Copy) : Copy data from FD to PT

9Q4C-F003 9Q4C-F056

(Print) : Print (Find) : Search

9Q4C-F055 9Q4C-F012

(Copy) : Copy (UP) : Upload

9Q4C-F005 9Q4C-F013

(Delete) : Delete (DOWN) : Download

9Q4C-F006 9Q4C-F014

(Details) : Display details (List for MC) : List for machine

9Q4C-F007 9Q4C-F015

(List) : Lot data list (Nozzle) : Nozzle changer data sharing

9Q4C-F008 9Q4C-F042

③ Folder information area

The folder structure (hierarchy) is displayed on the basis of line configuration data. When you
click a folder (icon), its contents are displayed in the file information area.

“-” shows subfolders are displayed.

“+” shows subfolders are hidden.
When you click “-,” subfolders (e.g. under the
PANASONIC folder in the right figure) are hidden
and “+” is displayed.
When you click “+,” sub folders and “-” are
displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-012

Selected folder
Icon
Showing the top (root directory) of this system
733C-F001

Showing PT
733C-F002

Showing data folder

733C-F003

Showing lot folder

9Q4C-F003

Showing FD (Machine) folder

733C-F006

Showing line configuration

733C-F004

Showing the machine connected to PT

733C-F005

Page 2-4 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00

 2.1 Outline of Filer

④ File information area

The data files and folders contained in the folder selected in the folder information area are
displayed.
At this screen, you can select the file to be copied or edited.

2)
3)
4)

1)

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-013

1) The contents of this selected folder are displayed.

2)
To sort folders and files in ascending order, click one of these items. To sort them in descending
order, click it a second time. (Folders are displayed ahead of files.)
3)
Folder
Double-clicking it displays its contents.
4)
File
To select a file, click it.

Icon
Showing data folder
733C-F003

733C-F007
Showing production data of a single machine
Showing production data of module
9Q4C-F005

Showing uncreated data (only in lot)

733C-F009

OK Showing checked data (Data check is performed by the editor.)

(It can be downloaded to the machine.)
>> Showing the data registered in the list for machine
Showing downloaded data
733C-F012

∗∗ Showing that there is a track record of production on the machine

(It is displayed even when one board has been produced after download; then,
after you modify and save this data on PT, it changes to “OK” mark.)

⑤ Event display area

The transactions performed by machines and PT are displayed.
It is displayed when you click “Output” from “View” menu.

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00 Page 2-5

2.1 Outline of Filer

2.1.3 Filer Display Functions

Describes the functions about the filer display.

T
Display field adjustment
You can adjust the size of the file information area and the display field of each item.
When a pointer on a boundary line changes to or , this line can be moved.

1 2
9Q4C-EPt-Fi-014

?
When you place a pointer on this line and drag it to the right and left, the area of the file
information area is changed.
@
When you place a pointer on the line between items and drag it to the right and left, the area of
the item is changed.
When you double-click the line, the area is automatically adjusted so that it will fit to the
displayed items.

(Adjustment example)

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-015

T
Details display
When you choose a data file and click (Details) on the tool bar, the details (property) of the
file are displayed.

1
9Q4C-EPt-Fi-016

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-017

Page 2-6 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00

 2.1 Outline of Filer

T
Group display setting
The group folders to be displayed in the folder information area can be set.

1. Choose “Selection of displayed group”

from “View” on the menu bar.

• <Selection of displayed group> window

opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-018

2. Click ['] (check box) of the desired

group.

• The groups with ['] in their check boxes are

displayed.

• You can set the groups also by selecting the

desired groups and then clicking [Display] or
[Not display].

• Clicking [All display] displays all groups.

• Clicking [Sort] sorts the groups in the

[Selection of displayed group] window in
descending or ascending order. (The order of
9Q4C-EPt-Fi-019
group folders is not changed.)

3. Click [OK].
• If you set groups as shown left, the group
folders are displayed as follows.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-021
9Q4C-EPt-Fi-020

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00 Page 2-7

2.1 Outline of Filer

T
Display item setting
The items to be displayed in the file information area and the order can be set.
∗ The displays of “PTFile” and “MCFile” cannot be changed.

1. Choose “Select the display field” from

“View” on the menu bar.

• <Setting of display item> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-022

2. Click ['] (check box) of the desired item.

• The items with ['] in their check boxes are
displayed.

• You can set the items also by selecting the

desired items and then clicking [Display] or
[Not display].

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-023

3. To change the order, select the desired

item and click [Up] or [Down].

• Every clicking moves the item up (ahead) and

down (back).

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-024

To the next page

Page 2-8 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00

 2.1 Outline of Filer

4. Click [OK].
• If you set items as left, they are displayed as
follows.

∗ Adjust the width of each item as you like.

( T Display field adjustment)

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-026

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-025

T
Lot data list display
You can view the lot data list and its details.

1. Click (List) on the tool bar.

• <View Lot Data List> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-027

2. Select the desired group name and lot

name, then click [Refresh Lot Data List].

• The lot data are displayed on the lot data list.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-028

To the next page

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00 Page 2-9

2.1 Outline of Filer

3. To display the details of lot data, click

the desired data from the list.

• The details of the chosen data are displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-029

• Clicking [OK] closes the window.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-030

T
Search display
When there are a lot of data entries, you can search to display them.

1. Click (Find) on the tool bar.

• <Find> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-031

To the next page

Page 2-10 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00

 2.1 Outline of Filer

2. Enter the search criteria.

The following four criteria can be set. (At least
1 one of them is required for search.)

? File type (name)

@ Location
2 A Date
B File type (conditions)

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-032

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-033

3. After the search criteria are entered,

click [Start].

• The files that match the search criteria are

displayed at the lower part of the window.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-034

To the next page

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00 Page 2-11

2.1 Outline of Filer

4. Choose a displayed file and click [Jump].

• The file is displayed in the file information
area.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-041

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-042

T
Only the latest-version file display

1. Choose “Display only the latest version”

from “View” on the menu bar.

• To display all data, choose “All data.”

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-070

Page 2-12 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00

 2.2 Creating a New PT File

2.2 Creating a New PT File

2.2.1 Method of Newly Creation
There are some methods of new PT file creation as follows. Select one of them according to the
situation.

A) From scratch
?
Create a group folder.
↓
@
Create a lot folder.
↓
A
Start the editor (edit).
↓
B
Exit the editor.

B) Using an existing PT file

?
Create a group folder.
↓
@
Create a lot folder.
↓
A
Copy the PT file.
↓
B
Start the editor (edit).
↓
C
Exit the editor.

C) Using an existing lot

?
Create a group folder.
↓
@
Copy the lot folder.
↓
A
Start the editor (edit).
↓
B
Exit the editor.

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00 Page 2-13

2.2 Creating a New PT File

2.2.2 Creating a Group Folder

1. Choose “Create Group Folder” from
“File” on the menu bar.

• <Generate Group Folder> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-035

2. Type the group name and click [OK].

• <Generate Group Folder> window closes and
the group folder is created.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-036

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-037

Page 2-14 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00

 2.2 Creating a New PT File

2.2.3 Creating a Lot

1. Click (LOT) on the menu bar.

• <Create Lot> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-037

2. Specify the location and the name.

?
Select the group where the lot will be
1 created.

@
Type the lot name.
2
A
Type the notes as needed.

3 3. Click [OK].

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-039

• <Create Lot> window closes, and the lot

folder and “NON_ENTRY!!” file is created.

∗ As many “NON_ENTRY!!” files as the

machines and modules composing the line
are created.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-040

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00 Page 2-15

2.2 Creating a New PT File

2.2.4 Starting the Editor

“NON_ENTRY!!” file will be automatically named when the editor is started.
After that, it will be displayed in the filer as a PT file.

1. Select a file, then click (Editor) on

the tool bar.

• <Run Editor> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-044

2. Click [OK].
• The editor corresponding to the machine or
module is started.
(The screen on the left shows the case of
Module1. In this case, the modular editor is
started.)

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-043

• A file name is automatically named according

to the following rule.
“Lot name_Machine file name”

• To exit the editor, click [Close]; then, click

[Yes] or [No] at the overwrite window.

• For data edit, refer to “Programming Manual

(Editors).”

• Before changing a file name, exit the editor.

( 2.3.2 Changing a PT File Name)

MEDI-EPt-Ed-001

Page 2-16 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00

 2.3 File Operations (Copy into PT, Changing a Name, Deleting)

2.3 File Operations (Copy into PT, Changing a Name, Deleting)

2.3.1 Copying a File in PT
Describes how to copy PT files and lot folders into PT.
For copying to FD, see “2.5.2 Transferring Data via FD.”

T
PT file copy

NOTICE
To copy a PT file, the copy destination shall have “NON_ENTRY!!” file.
( 2.2.3 Creating a Lot)

1. Select the file to be copied.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-048

2. Drag and drop the selected file onto the

copy-destination lot folder.
Or, select the PT file to be copied, and
click (Copy).

• <Copy File in PT> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-049

To the next page

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00 Page 2-17

2.3 File Operations (Copy into PT, Changing a Name, Deleting)

3. Specify the copy destination and the file

name.

?Select the copy-destination group name and lot

name.
• When you have dragged and dropped the file
in step 2, this operation is not required.

@Type the machine file name.

∗ It shall not be the same name as the other
data files in PT.

A
Type the machine file name.
1
B Type the notes as needed.

2
4. Click [OK].
• The file is copied.
3
4

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-050

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-051

Page 2-18 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00

 2.3 File Operations (Copy into PT, Changing a Name, Deleting)

T
Lot copy
When the lot is copied, also the PT files in the lot are copied.

1. Select the lot to be copied, and click

(Copy).

• <Copy each lot> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-052

2. Specify the copy-destination lot name.

1 ?
Select the copy-destination group name.

@Type the lot name.

2
∗ It shall not be the same name as the other lots
in PT.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-053

3. Click the copy-destination file name,

then click [Rename].

• <Input the PT file name after duplicating>

window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-054

To the next page

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00 Page 2-19

2.3 File Operations (Copy into PT, Changing a Name, Deleting)

4. Type the PT file name and machine file

name, and click [OK].

∗ It shall not be the same name as the other

data files in PT.

5. Perform steps 3 to 4 as many number of

times as PT files.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-055

6. Click [OK].
• The lot is copied together with the PT files.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-056

• All the versions of the PT files in the copied lot

become “01.”

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-057

Page 2-20 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00

 2.3 File Operations (Copy into PT, Changing a Name, Deleting)

2.3.2 Changing a PT File Name

NOTICE
• The PT file names registered in the machine list cannot be changed.
• Even if it is in another group or lot, it is not possible to change its name to the
same one as the other PT files in PT.

1. Select the desired file.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-059

2. Choose “Rename” from “File” on the

menu bar.

• <Rename> window is displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-058

3. Type a new PT file name.

∗ When you will not change the machine file
name, steps 4 to 5 are not required. Go on to
step 6.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-060

To the next page

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00 Page 2-21

2.3 File Operations (Copy into PT, Changing a Name, Deleting)

4. Click [MCFile] radio button.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-060

5. Type a new machine file name.

6. Click [OK].
• The file is changed.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-061
2

∗ The different-version PT file name is also

changed to the same name.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-062

Page 2-22 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00

 2.3 File Operations (Copy into PT, Changing a Name, Deleting)

2.3.3 Deleting a File

Describes how to delete a group, lot, and data file.

NOTICE
• Deleted PT file becomes “NON_ENTRY!!” file.
• The group that contains lots cannot be deleted. If you want to do that, delete the
lots and then delete the group.
• The PT files registered in the list for machine cannot be deleted.
• “NON_ENTRY!!” file cannot be deleted.

1. Select the file to be deleted.

<Deleting a group> <Deleting a lot> <Deleting a PT file>

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-063 9Q4C-EPt-Fi-064 9Q4C-EPt-Fi-065

2. Click (Delete) on the tool bar.

• The details of the data to be deleted are

displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-066

3. Click [OK].
• The group and lot are deleted, then the PT file
becomes “NON_ENTRY!!” file.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-067

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-068

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-069

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A01-00 Page 2-23

2.4 Registering to List for Machine
2.

2.4 Registering to List for Machine

Describes how to create the list used to download data from machines.

1. Click (List for MC) on the tool bar.

• <List for MC> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-072

2. Click [Select Entry File].

• <Select Entry File for List for MC> window
opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-073

3. Select the group name, lot name, and

machine name where the file will be
1 registered.

∗ When you select “WORK” in the group name

field, the lot name field is not displayed.
2

4. Click [Refresh PT File Llist].

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-074

To the next page

Page 2-24 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00

 2.4 Registering to List for Machine

5. Click the version whose data will be

registered.

• The details of the selected data are displayed

at the lower part of the screen.

6. Click [OK].
1
• <Select Entry File for List for MC> window
closes, and the details of the selected data
are displayed at the left of <List for MC>
window.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-075
2

7. Select the desired No. and click [Entry].

• The data is registered in the list.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-076

8. Click [OK].
• The filer is displayed and the mark is added to
the data registered in the list.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-077

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-078

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00 Page 2-25

2.5 Transferring Data between PT and Machines

2.5 Transferring Data between PT and Machines

PT has the following methods of the data transfer between PT and machines.
1. Communication (Download, Upload)
2. FD (From PT to FD, From FD to PT)
This section describes these methods.

NOTICE
Normally, data transfer shall be carried out by communication.
If for some reason the network between PT and machines is down, use a floppy disk
to transfer data from PT to machines immediately.

2.5.1 Transferring Data by Communication (Download, Upload)

In this manual, download means transferring the production data from PT to machines, and
upload means transferring the production data from machines to PT.
∗ While the main menu is displayed on the machine’s touch panel, communication is available.

T
Download
1. Select the data to be downloaded, and
click (DOWN).

2 • <Download File (PT→MC)> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-079 1

2. To download data by module, click the

demand-field check box and select the
machine to be downloaded.

∗ When you download data by machine, this

operation is not required.

3. Click [Download].
1 • The message “Downloading” appears.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-080
2

• The message disappears, download is

complete, and mark is added to the
downloaded file.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-115

Page 2-26 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00

 2.5 Transferring Data between PT and Machines

T
Upload
∗ Only the data downloaded from PT can be uploaded.
(It is not possible to upload the data loaded from FD or HD.)

1. Click the machine icon that contains the

data to be uploaded.
3
2 • The data in the selected machine are
displayed.
1
9Q4C-EPt-Fi-120
2. Select the data to be uploaded, and click
(UP).

• <Upload File (MC→PT)> window opens.

3. Click [OK].
• The message “Uploading” appears.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-121

• The message disappears and upload is

complete.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-120

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00 Page 2-27

2.5 Transferring Data between PT and Machines

2.5.2 Transferring Data via FD

This is used when the production data is saved in the floppy disk.

T
From PT to FD
Only one data can be saved to one floppy disk.
1. Select the data to be transferred to the
floppy disk, and click (FD Copy).

2 • <Confirmation> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-079
1

2. If it is all right to delete the data in the

floppy disk, click [Yes].

• <Transfer File (PT→FD)> window opens, and

the message “Copying Data to FD” appears.
9Q4C-EPt-Fi-086

• After the message disappears, transferring

data to the floppy disk is complete.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-087

• Clicking in the folder information area

displays the information about the floppy disk.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-118

Page 2-28 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00

 2.5 Transferring Data between PT and Machines

T
From FD to PT

NOTICE
This function is under development as of August, 2002.
To load the FD data from machines, use the import function of the line converter.
(Refer to the Programming Manual (Line Converter).)

When data is transferred from a floppy disk to PT, the process differs as follows, depending on
whether the production data is registered or not.

Production data entry Process

The data is registered newly.
Not registered
The lot shall have “NON_ENTRY!!” file.
Agreed The data is overwritten.
∗1 You are warned of the
M/C file names agreed Simple data check
Registered Disagreed differences in values; choosing
Continue overwrites the data.
The data is registered as the version that is different from the
M/C file names disagreed
registered one.

∗1 ：When M/C file names agree, the files are checked whether they are identical, by comparing the
board size and number of mounting points.

1. Insert the floppy disk that contains data

into the floppy disk drive of PT.

2. Choose in the folder information

area.

733C-EPt-Fi-150

3. Drag and drop the data to be copied

onto the destination folder.

∗ This procedure supposes M/C file names

agree.

733C-EPt-Fi-151

To the next page

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00 Page 2-29

2.5 Transferring Data between PT and Machines

4. Specify a machine name.

5. Click [OK].
• <Transfer File (FD→PT)> window opens, and
the message “Copying Data from FD”
appears.

733C-EPt-Fi-152 2

• After the message disappears, transferring

data to PT is complete.

733C-EPt-Fi-078

Page 2-30 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00

 2.6 Creating a Revision

2.6 Creating a Revision

When a lot contains more than one different version of data, one data per machine (module) can
be extracted from them and managed as a revision.

NOTICE
We do not recommend using the revision on the PT200 system, because it is difficult
to manage after created.
If you need it in order to divide data into each place of destination, we recommend
you to create the lot, not the revision.

1. Choose “Create Revision” from “File” on

the menu bar.

• <Create Revision> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-089

2. Select the group name and lot name,

then click [Refresh Lot Data List].

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-090

3. Type the revision name.

4. From among the lot data list of each

1 machine (module), select the data that
becomes the revision.

• The details of the selected data are displayed

at the lower part of the screen.
2

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-091

To the next page

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00 Page 2-31

2.6 Creating a Revision

5. Click [OK].
• The notes input window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-092

6. Type the notes and click [OK].

• It is not always required to type the notes.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-093

• The window closes and the revision is

created.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-094

Page 2-32 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00

 2.6 Creating a Revision

T
Revision deletion
1. Select the revision folder to be deleted,
and click (Delete).

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-095

2. Click [OK].
• The revision is deleted.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-096

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00 Page 2-33

2.7 Sharing Nozzle Changer Data

2.7 Sharing Nozzle Changer Data

2.7.1 About Nozzle Changer Data
NOTICE
Depending on the setting conditions, such as nozzle arrangement fixation, nozzle
changer fixation, nozzle position prohibition setting, nozzle changer prohibition
setting, etc., sharing nozzle changer data may be disabled.

The nozzle changing (nozzle automatic changing feature) of the high-speed machine
(20X-series machine) is done when the production board data is changed. (Nozzles will not be
changed during automatic operation.)
To automatically change nozzles when the production board data is changed, the nozzle
arrangement of the nozzle changer shall be the same in the machine data before and after the
production-board data is changed.
The nozzle changer data of more than one machine data are shared by PT so that the condition
of nozzle automatic changing will be satisfied.
∗ For the multi-functional machine (30X-series machine), data cannot be shared.

2.7.2 Screen of Nozzle Changer Data Sharing

? List of the machine file names to be shared
(Add machine data using the machine data
addition button.)

1 @ The nozzle arrangement of the nozzle

changer after shared
2

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-107

[Delete MCData (D)] : Deletes the machine data registered in the list to be shared from the
list. (The machine data will not be deleted.)

[Add MCData (A)] : Registers machine data into the list to be shared.

[Start (E)] : Writes the shared nozzle changer data into the machine data
registered in the list.

[Cancel] : Exits the nozzle changer sharing.

[Choose the pattern] : Loads the combination of nozzle arrangement and machine data
registered at the time of the last sharing.

Page 2-34 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00

 2.7 Sharing Nozzle Changer Data

2.7.3 Sharing Nozzle Changer Data

1. Click (Nozzle) on the tool bar.

• <NzlChanger Integration> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-108

2. Click [Choose the pattern].

∗ To load the combination pattern of nozzle
arrangement and machine data registered
before, do the steps 2 to 3. To add new
machine data, do the step from 4 onward.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-111

3. Select the pattern name and click

[Read].

• To load also the combination of machine data

1 at the time when it was shared, tick off
‘Machine file name reading when integrate.’

2
9Q4C-EPt-Fi-112

To the next page

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00 Page 2-35

2.7 Sharing Nozzle Changer Data

4. Register the machine data whose nozzle

changer data will be shared, and click
[Add MCData].

• <Select MC Data> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-111

5. Select the group folder, lot name, and

machine data, then click [OK].
1
• The machine data is registered in the list.
2
∗ If the nozzle changer is short of the vacant
racks, the message as shown below appears.
3
In this case, click [OK], then click [Cancel] on
9Q4C-EPt-Fi-110
4 the machine data selection window to share
the data registered so far.

444C-EPt-EdNc-006

• <Nzlchanger Integration> window opens.

6. Click [Start].
• The data are shared and reflected onto the
machine data registered in the list.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-107

To the next page

Page 2-36 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00

 2.7 Sharing Nozzle Changer Data

7. To name and register the nozzle

changer arrangement, click [Yes]. If not,
click [No].

• When the created arrangement is named after

shared, it can be used as the pattern any
444C-EPt-EdNc-011 number of times.

8. Type the pattern name and click [Save].

• The window closes and the process is
complete.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-109

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00 Page 2-37

2.7 Sharing Nozzle Changer Data

T
Limiting condition for nozzle changing
Depending on the nozzle arrangement, that is to say, the positions where nozzles will actually be
attached to the mount head, and on the rack positions of the nozzle changer, some nozzles
cannot be changed by the nozzle changer. The nozzle changer data are shared so that they will
not violate this condition.

Limiting condition (In the case of CM202)

The nozzle changer data are shared so that they will not violate this condition.
The following figure shows the rack arrangement of the nozzle changer. Every rack has a
number (11 to 43).
Also the nozzle arrangement of the mount head has the nozzle arrangement numbers (1 to 6).
The nozzle arrangement numbers are restricted according to the rack positions as follows.

444C-631E

Page 2-38 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00

 2.7 Sharing Nozzle Changer Data

Limiting condition (In the case of CM402)

The following figure shows the rack arrangement of the nozzle changer. Every rack has a
number (11 to 66).
Also the nozzle arrangement of the mount head has the nozzle arrangement numbers (1 to 8).
The nozzle arrangement numbers are restricted according to the rack positions as follows.

MEDI-027E

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00 Page 2-39

2.8 Importing/Exporting Data

2.8 Importing/Exporting Data

2.8.1 Conditions for Import/Export
The import function registers the exported MS-DOS format data file into the filer so that you can
edit it. The export function exports the created data file into MS-DOS format data file.

Source Destination
Import “C:¥PT200¥FilePath” directory Specified lot folder
or
FD created by the export function
Export Created PT file specified “C:¥PT200¥FilePath” directory
or
FD

NOTICE
For the modular machine, importing and exporting are carried out for each module.
Therefore, it is not possible to import a single machine’s file (PT100 and machine
output data) of modular machine.
To import a single machine’s file, convert the single machine into the module using
the import function of the line converter.

2.8.2 Import

NOTICE
To import data, the import-destination lot shall have “NON_ENTRY!!” file.
( 2.2.3 Creating a Lot)

1. Choose “Import” from “File” on the menu

bar.

• <Import MS_DOS File> window opens.

• The data file names in “C:¥PT200¥FilePath”

directory are displayed at the left of the
window.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-097

To the next page

Page 2-40 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00

 2.8 Importing/Exporting Data

2. Select the data file name to be imported.

• The selected data file name is displayed in the
import file name field located at the right of the
window.

∗ Ticking off ‘FD Drive’ displays the data file

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-098
names in a floppy disk.

3. Select the destination.

• Select the existing group name, lot name, and
machine name.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-099

4. Type the new data names.

• Type the PT file name, machine file name,
and notes.

5. Click [Import].
• It is imported to the filer as a data file.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-100

• If you will not import, click [Cancel]. <Filer>

window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-101

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00 Page 2-41

2.8 Importing/Exporting Data

2.8.3 Export
1. Choose “Export” from “File” on the menu
bar.

• <Export MS_DOS File> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-102

2. Click [Select Export File].

• <Select Export File> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-105

3. Select the group name, lot name, and

machine name.

4. Click [Refresh PT File List].

• The data file names in the lot folder are
displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-103

To the next page

Page 2-42 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00

 2.8 Importing/Exporting Data

5. Select the data file to be exported.

• The details of the selected data are displayed
at the lower part of the screen.

6. Click [OK].
1 • <Select Export File> window closes.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-104
2

7. Click [Export].
• The file names are displayed on the list
located at the right of the window.

∗ Ticking off “FD Drive” saves the exported data

into a floppy disk.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-105

8. Click [Close].
• <Export MS_DOS File> window closes.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-106

9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00 Page 2-43

2.8 Importing/Exporting Data

2.8.4 Importing Data of Old Machines (PT-Nonsupport Models)

On-line operation between PT and new machines (PT-support machines) is realized via
Ethernet; however, old machines cannot use the on-line operation via Ethernet because they
have been used optical communication as the means of the on-line operation.
To load the old machines’ data into the PT200 system, use the import function of the line
converter.
However, the PT200 system cannot manage the old machines’ data.

Page 2-44 9Q4C-E-PMD02-A02-00

3.

3. VARIOUS INFORMATION
DISPLAY

PT lets you know the status of the communication with the machines connected, events (past
operations), and production status.

9Q4C-E-PMD03-A00-00 Page 3-1

3.1 Line Monitor
3.

3.1 Line Monitor

Line monitor is one of the applications composing PT, letting you know the current status of such
as chip mounter and adhesive dispenser, through the network.

3.1.1 Starting the Line Monitor

To start the line monitor, double-click “LineMonitor” icon from [Tool] in the menu box.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-001

3.1.2 Status of Monitor and Machine

Monitor
Green: Network is connected. Data communication (upload and download) is
733C-L001 available.
“Main menu” screen is displayed on the machine.

Yellow: Network is connected. Data communication (upload and download) is not

733C-L002 available.
“Main menu” screen is not displayed on the machine.

Red: Network is not connected. Data communication is not available.

733C-L003

Blue ripple: Uploading

733C-L005

Yellow Downloading
733C-L006 ripple:

Gray: The monitor is now starting. Data communication is not available.

733C-L007

Page 3-2 9Q4C-E-PMD03-A01-00

 3.1 Line Monitor

3.1.3 Changing Display Types

TTitle bar display/hide
When the monitor is launched, the title bar is hidden; however, double-clicking the monitor
displays its title bar.
When you choose “Without TitleBar” from “Setup” on the menu bar, the title bar will be hidden
again.

Without title bar With title bar

733C-EPt-Li-002

733C-EPt-Li-009

TArranging monitor always/not always front

When you choose “Show always front” from “Setup” on the menu bar, the line monitor is
displayed in front of the other applications all the time even if it is not active.

733C-EPt-Li-010

Always arranged front Not always arranged front

733C-EPt-Li-011 733C-EPt-Li-012

9Q4C-E-PMD03-A01-00 Page 3-3

3.1 Line Monitor

3.1.4 Switching the Logic Mode

If for some reason any trouble occurs in communication, you can switch the communication
mode to the FD mode.
To return the FD mode to the communication mode, do the same procedure.

NOTICE
In the operator mode, this function is disabled.

1. Choose “Logic Mode” from “Setup” on

the menu bar.

• <Change Logic Mode> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Li-001

2. Select the machine and mode, and click

[OK].

• The warning message appears.

9Q4C-EPt-Li-003

3. Click [Yes].
• The warning message appears again.

9Q4C-EPt-Li-004

4. Click [Yes].
• The logic mode is switched over.

9Q4C-EPt-Li-005

Page 3-4 9Q4C-E-PMD03-A01-00

 3.2 Event Viewer

3.2 Event Viewer

Event viewer, which is one of the applications composing PT, manages the events of PT and the
machines on the line managed by PT, through the network.

3.2.1 Starting the Event Viewer

To start the event viewer, double-click “EventViewer” icon from [Tool] in the menu box.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-001

3.2.2 Main Screen of Event Viewer

When the event viewer is launched, the following window opens. (Contents of display vary.)
1

733C-EPt-Ev-001

① Menu bar
When you place a pointer on a menu name and click it, the command menu opens.
Then click to choose a command. (Some menus contain sub menus.)

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-003

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-002
9Q4C-EPt-Ev-001

9Q4C-E-PMD03-A01-00 Page 3-5

3.2 Event Viewer

② Tool bar
The commands to be used frequently are represented by icons. To execute a command, place a
pointer on the icon and click it.

733C-EPt-Ev-001

Open file Display all the events

9Q4C-F043 9Q4C-F047

Save file Specified event display setting

9Q4C-F044 9Q4C-F020

Display machine events Update information

9Q4C-F045 9Q4C-F048

Display PT events Sort in chronological order

9Q4C-F046 9Q4C-F049

Log setting Sort by object

9Q4C-F018 9Q4C-F050

Production control information file

9Q4C-F019 setting

③ Event display area

You can select machine events or PT events.
Machine event screen

733C-EPt-Ev-001

PT event screen

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-004

Page 3-6 9Q4C-E-PMD03-A01-00

 3.2 Event Viewer

3.2.3 Changing Display Types

TSpecific event display
You can specify the events to be displayed, from among the event occurrence date and time,
remote service type, and event type.
1. Click on the tool bar.

• <Event to view> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-005

2. Specify the event to be displayed.

1 ? Specify the date and time.
• Specify the date and time of ‘Start to view’ and
‘Finish to view’ fields.
• Selecting ‘from First Event’ displays from the
oldest event onward. Selecting ‘to Last Event’
displays until the latest event.

@ Specify the remote service type.

• Specify the type of the remote service to be
9Q4C-EPt-Ev-006 displayed.

A Specify the event type.

• Click the event to be displayed. The events
with ['] in the check box will be displayed.

2 3

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-007

3. Click [From New Event] or [From Old

Event].
9Q4C-EPt-Ev-008

• The specified events are displayed in the

selected order.

9Q4C-E-PMD03-A01-00 Page 3-7

3.2 Event Viewer

3.2.4 Setups
TLog setting
The logs to be displayed by the event viewer can be specified.
1. Click on the tool bar.

• <Setup Log> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-005

2. Do the log setting.

? Select the event logs to be created.
• The logs with ['] in the check box will be
1 created.

@ Log file environmental setting

Select one of the following methods.
• ‘∗∗∗ MB: writeover’
As long as the capacity exceeds the specified
2
one, a log file will be overwritten.
(A new log file will overwrite the oldest one.)
• ‘∗∗∗ Day(s):create file every days’
The folders will be divided and saved by the
specified number of days.
• [Select Directory]
Clicking this opens the following window, then
the directory where the log files will be saved
can be specified.

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-010

A Specify the event logs to be deleted.

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-009
• Specify how many days are required to elapse
before the logs are deleted.
• If you remove ['] from the check box, the logs
will not be deleted.

3. Click [OK].
• Exits the log setting.
• If you click [Cancel], the settings will not be
reflected.

Page 3-8 9Q4C-E-PMD03-A01-00

 3.2 Event Viewer

T
Production control information file setting
The timing to delete the production control information files to be displayed by the production
information viewer can be specified.
1. Click on the tool bar.

• <Setup Production Report File> window

opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-005

2. Specify the number of days to be

elapsed before deletion.

• Once the specified number of days have

passed, the target files will be deleted.

• If you remove ['] from the check box, the files

will not be deleted even if the specified
number of days have passed.

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-011

3. Click [OK].
• Exits the production control information file
setting.

• If you click [Cancel], the settings will not be

reflected.

9Q4C-EPt-Ev-011

9Q4C-E-PMD03-A01-00 Page 3-9

3.3 Production Information Viewer

3.3 Production Information Viewer

Production information viewer, which is one of the applications composing PT, displays the
production control information displayed on the machine onto PT. It is used to view the
production control information on PT.
∗ Whenever one production board is produced, each machine records and renews such as
running information and stop information as a production control information, which you can
view. Simultaneously, it is transferred to PT; so whenever the production information viewer is
launched, the latest production control information is displayed on PT.

3.3.1 Starting the Production Information Viewer

To start the production information viewer, double-click “Product Viewer” icon from [Tool] in the
menu box.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-001

Page 3-10 9Q4C-E-PMD03-A01-00

 3.3 Production Information Viewer

3.3.2 Main Screen of Production Information Viewer

When the production information viewer is launched, the following window opens.
(Contents of display vary with the machine.)

1
2

9Q4C-EPt-Pv-004

① Menu bar
When you place a pointer on a menu name and click it, the command menu opens. Then click to
choose a command. (Some menus contain sub menus.)

9Q4C-EPt-Pv-002

9Q4C-EPt-Pv-003
9Q4C-EPt-Pv-001

② Target machine information

The machine name, date and time, and the others displayed in the production control information
display area are displayed.
Clicking of ‘MC Name’ field opens the menu, then you can select the desired machine.

③ Production control information display area

Each machine’s production control information is displayed. Clicking the tab displays the
corresponding sheet. Data cannot be edited.

9Q4C-E-PMD03-A01-00 Page 3-11

3.3 Production Information Viewer

T
Other production information reference
You can refer to the past production data and the others.

1. Chose “Refer Another Production

Report” from “File” on the menu bar.

• <Select Production report> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Pv-005

2. Select the machine name and

production information data, and click
[OK].

• The selected production information data is

displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Pv-006

T
Production control information file setting
To set, click on the menu bar of the event viewer.
( “3.2.4 Setups” in “3.2 Event Viewer”)

Page 3-12 9Q4C-E-PMD03-A01-00

4.

4. PARTS LIBRARY

Some tools composing PT require the parts data to be input.

The parts data registered as a library can be used by each tool.
This chapter describes how to use the parts library and register new parts data.
∗ The parts data described in this chapter is the information about the parts themselves including
the feeders, and does not depend on the machine.
The parts data can be collectively displayed and edited by the parts library editor.

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A00-00 Page 4-1

4.1 How to Use the Parts Library
4.

4.1 How to Use the Parts Library

Each of the tools composing PT, such as editor and line converter, uses the parts library.
This section describes how to select the parts from the parts library list window of the parts
library editor; even if the parts library list is displayed at the input screen of the other tools, use
the same selecting procedure.

4.1.1 Starting the Parts Library Editor

To start the parts library editor, double-click “Parts Library Editor” icon from [Tool] in the menu
box; then the parts library editor is launched and the parts library list window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-001

4.1.2 Parts Library List Window

1

3 4

? Menu bar
@ Tool bar
A Tool area
B Parts library display area

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-001

① Menu bar
When you place a pointer on a menu name and click it, the command menu opens. Then click to
choose a command. (Some menus contain sub menus.)

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-006
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-007

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-003

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-005
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-004

Page 4-2 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A01-00

 4.1 How to Use the Parts Library

② Tool bar
The commands to be used frequently are represented by icons. To execute a command, just
click the icon.
1) 3) 5)

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-008

2) 4) 6)

1) Register new chip data

2) Search chip library
3) Display chip name list
4) Display favorites
5) Display histories
6) Print

③ Tool area
Each tool used to select parts data is displayed.

Search List Favorites Histories

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-009 9Q4C-EPt-Pe-010 9Q4C-EPt-Pe-011 9Q4C-EPt-Pe-012

④ Parts library display area

Lists the parts data.

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A01-00 Page 4-3

4.1 How to Use the Parts Library

T
All data display
When the parts library editor is launched, nothing is displayed.
Clicking [Search] in the tool area displays all data.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-013

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-001

T
Display item setting
When choosing “Setting of display item” from “Display” on the menu bar, you can specify the
items to be hidden or sort them.
∗ The operating procedure is the same as that for the filer.
( “T Display item setting” in “2. FILER”)

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-014
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-015

Page 4-4 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A01-00

 4.1 How to Use the Parts Library

4.1.3 Using the Search Function

A wealth of parts data is registered, so normally retrieve and select the desired one.

T
Search type
There are three types as follows; these can be used independently or combinedly.
∗ When you use all these three types, only the data that agrees with those three conditions is
displayed.
O Search for parts name
O Search for chip name
O Search for chip type

T
Search for parts name
1. Type the parts name and click [Search].
• The parts data whose parts name includes the
typed characters is displayed.

• When clicking a pull-down button , you can

select it from among the characters searched
for until now.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-016

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-017

∗ You can choose when to display it, when the

typed characters agree with the front of the
parts name or when these are included in the
parts name.
Clicking [Customizing] displays the next
window.

• Select the search method and click [OK].

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-018

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A01-00 Page 4-5

4.1 How to Use the Parts Library

T
Search for chip name
You can search for the chip name from among the data whose parts name is found.
1. Click ‘Chip name’ and type the chip
name.

• When clicking a pull-down button , you can

select it from among the characters searched
for until now.

2. Click [Search].
2 • The data that agrees with the typed parts
name and chip name is displayed.

1
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-019

T
Search for chip type
You can search for the chip type from among the data whose parts name is found.
1. Click ‘Chip kind.’
• The chip type selecting window and the chip
illustrations are displayed.

1 2. Click the desired illustration.

• Clicking a pull-down button lets you
select it from the chip type list.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-020 2

3. Select the chip to be retrieved, and click

[Select].

4. Click [Search].
• The data that agrees with the typed parts
name and chip type is displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-021 2

Page 4-6 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A01-00

 4.1 How to Use the Parts Library

4.1.4 Selecting from List

The data can be displayed by chip type.
1. Click (List) on the menu bar.

• The folders for each chip type are displayed in

the tool area.
1

2. Double-click the folder of the chip type to

2 be displayed.

• All the data of this chip type are displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-022

4.1.5 Selecting from Histories

The data displayed before can be displayed again.
1. Click (History) on the menu bar.

• The folders including the data displayed

before are displayed.
1

2. Double-click the desired folder.

• The data displayed on the specified date or
week is displayed.

∗ Clicking [Clear] deletes all the histories.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-023
2

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A01-00 Page 4-7

4.1 How to Use the Parts Library

4.1.6 Selecting from Favorites

The parts data used frequently can be registered as favorites. Once registered, these can be
easily displayed in future.

T
Registering procedure
1. While the data to be registered as a
favorite is displayed, click (Favorite)
on the tool bar.

• (Add) icon, (Arrangement) icon, and

folders are displayed in the tool area.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-024

2. Click to select the parts data to be

registered, and click (Add).

• <Add to Favorite> window opens.

2

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-025 1

3. Select the desired folder and click [OK].

• The parts data is registered in this folder.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-026

T
How to use favorites
1. Click (Favorite) on the tool bar.

• The favorites folders are displayed in the tool

area.
1

2
2. Click the folder including the desired
data in the tool area.

• All the parts data registered in this folder are

displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-027

Page 4-8 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A01-00

 4.1 How to Use the Parts Library

T
Favorites organizing
You can conveniently organize the data and folders registered as favorites.
1. Click (Favorite) on the tool bar.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-028

2. Click (Arrangement) in the tool area.

• <Put Favorite in order> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-029

3. Organize the favorites.

[Create the folder]
When you click this, a new folder is created
directly under the selected folder.

[Move to the folder]

When you select and click the data or folder,
<Folder select> window opens; then select the
desired folder and click [OK].
∗ You can also drag and drop it.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-030
[Change the name]
When selecting and clicking the data or folder,
you can change the name.
∗ This changes only the name registered as a
favorite and does not change the parts name
in the data.

[Delete]
When selecting and clicking the data or folder,
you can delete it.
∗ In the case of folders, the warning message
does not appear; if it is OK, click [Yes].

4. When organizing is complete, click

[Close].
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-031

• <Put Favorite in order> window closes.

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A01-00 Page 4-9

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)
4.

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.1 Parts Library Registering Procedures
Register new data to the parts library using the following procedures.

High-versatility components, such as fixed resistor Low-versatility components, such as custom IC

and transistor
PT has the data of high-versatility chips beforehand as When the standard chip data is not available, create
a standard chip data. as follows.
First, load the standard chip data, then edit and
register to the library.

1. Starting the parts library editor 1. Starting the parts library editor

2. Editing from the parts name to the notes 2. Editing from the parts name to the notes

3. Loading the standard chip data∗

1
3. Editing the feeder information

4. Save and exit 4. Editing the chip data

5. Editing the chip extended data∗

1
∗1 : Loading the standard chip data is performed
in the machine data editing.

6. Inputting the commercial parts data

7. Editing the machine data

8. Registering the trays∗

2

9. Save and exit

∗1 : Editing the chip extended data is

performed only for such as QFP and
BGA.
∗2 : Registering the trays is performed for the
tray-feeding components.

Page 4-10 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.2 Starting the Parts Library Editor

TRegistering new data
1. Click (New) on the tool bar.

• The new data creating editor window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-032

T
Editing registered data
1. Double-click the parts data on the list.
• The editor window for this parts data is
displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-033

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-11

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.3 Parts Library Edit Windows

Parts edit window
1
2
3

4 5

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-034

Machine edit window

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-035

① Menu bar
② Tool bar
③ Input area for from the parts name to the notes
④ Feeder information edit area
⑤ Chip information edit area
⑥ Commercial parts input area
⑦ Machine data edit area
⑧ Loading the standard chip data

Page 4-12 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

① Menu bar
When you place a pointer on a menu name and click it, the command menu opens.
Then click to choose a command.

② Tool bar
The commands to be used frequently are represented by icons. To execute a command, click
the icon.

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-036

1) Register new data

2) Save
3) Close window
4) Edit parts
5) Edit QFP data
6) Edit BGA data
7) Edit machine

③ Input area for from the parts name to the notes ( 4.2.5)
Input the parts name, line name, and notes.

④ Feeder information edit area ( 4.2.6)

Edit the information about feeders, such as tape feeders and bulk feeders.

⑤ Chip information edit area ( 4.2.7)

Edit the information about chips, such as name and size.
The data input in this area are used as the initial values to edit the machine. Basically, input the
values described in the catalogue. They do not link to the mount data.

⑥ Commercial parts input area ( 4.2.10)

Input the maker name and name code corresponding to the parts data.

⑦ Machine data edit area ( 4.2.11)

Edit the information about the machine.

⑧ Loading the standard chip data ( 4.2.4)

Load the standard chip data as a source.

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-13

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.4 Loading the Standard Chip Data

PT has the data of high-versatility chips beforehand as a standard chip data.
For the high-versatility components, such as fixed resistor and transistor, loading the standard
chip data first will help you edit/register data to the library.

1. Click (Machine) at the parts edit

window.

• The <Editing Chip> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-034

2. Click (loading the standard chip

data) at the machine edit window.

• <Select chip kind> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-035

3. Double-click the chip type to be loaded.

• <Parts Library-Select standard chip> window
opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-046

To the next page

Page 4-14 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4. Select the chip name.

• The details of the selected data are displayed.

1
5. Click [OK].
• The standard chip data is loaded, then the
data are input in both the parts edit window
and the machine edit window.

∗ After that, when the parts name and feeder

information are input, the data can be
registered as a parts library.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-088 2

Machine edit window

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-089

Parts edit window

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-090

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-15

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.5 Editing from Parts Name to Notes

1 2
3
4
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-037

① ‘Part name’ (Type only when it is new.)

Type the parts name to be registered.
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be typed.
Once registered, it cannot be changed. When editing the existing data, you can only refer to it.

② ‘Extending No’ (Reference only)

If the same parts name is found when the data is converted by such as the line converter, a
number is displayed in this field. Every time the same parts name is found, a number is counted
up from one (1, 2, 3, … in order).
It is only reference and cannot be input.

③ ‘Line’
Normally, the line name set currently is displayed.
To register on such as the virtual line, select it.

④ ‘Comment’
Type anything you like. It is not always necessary to fill in this blank.

Page 4-16 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.6 Editing the Feeder Information

Describes how to edit the information about the feeders of the parts to be registered.
∗ When “Tray” is selected in the feeder type field, the tray data needs to be registered.
( 4.2.12 Editing the Tray Data)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-039

① ‘Feeder kind’
The machine’s motion varies according to the chip feeding type.
Choose one of the following types.

Tape Tube (Stick) Bulk

Reel Stick Bulk (Bulk components)

9Q4C-007E 9Q4C-008E 9Q4C-009E

Tray Ball Flux-transfer unit

Tray pallet
9Q4C-010E

② ‘Number of reel’
Set the number of the reels for this part. Up to 50 reels can be set. When the feeder arrangement
is automatically calculated, the parts are divided based on this number of the reels and the
number of the maximum feeder libraries available.
∗ For trays, set the number of tray pallets in the same way.

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-17

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

③ ‘Style’
The “style-of-packing angle” indicates the posture of the part to be fed.
Clicking opens <SlectStyle> window.
Choose the style of packing that matches the posture of the chips in the tape or tray.

NOTICE
• The “style-of-packing angle” has nothing to do with the pick-up angle, and the
pick-up and recognition conditions.
• When you have selected the chip type in the chip information before clicking
of the “style-of-packing angle,” the packing style of that chip is displayed with the
illustrations. ( 4.2.7 Editing the Chip Information)

The <SelectStyle> window

corresponding to the chip selected
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-040
here opens.

Examples of <SlectStyle> window

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-041 9Q4C-EPt-Pe-042

Tantalum capacitor Transistor

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-043 9Q4C-EPt-Pe-044

QFP FET

Page 4-18 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

④ ‘Tape kind’ (Required only when the tape is chosen in the feeder type field.)
Choose the type of the tape that is packing the components.
This data is required because the pick-up height varies according to the packing type.

Embossed : Chips are picked up at the height that they are fed by the feeder.
(There are three types: standard, deep groove, and ultra-deep groove.)
Paper/Adhe : Chips are picked up at the height that they are fed by the feeder in addition to that of
sive the chip thickness.

Paper Embossed

9Q4C-036E
Difference of pick-up height

⑤ ‘Feeder Width’ (Required only when the tape is chosen in the feeder type field.)
Choose the width of the tape feeder.
This data is required because the number of slots to be occupied varies according to the width.

⑥ ‘Reel size’ (Required only when the tape is chosen in the feeder type field.)
Choose the size of the tape reel.

Small : φ 178 mm
Large : φ 178 mm ~ φ 382 mm

⑦ ‘Sending pitch’ (Required only when the tape is chosen in the feeder type field.)
Choose the feed length of the tape to be required whenever a chip is fed.

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-19

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.7 Editing the Chip Information

Describes how to edit the information of the chip to be registered.
The data input here are used as the initial values for editing new machine data. Input the values
described in the catalogue.
NOTICE
When you load the standard chip data while editing the machine data, the standard
values to the shape are input. ( 4.2.11 Editing the Machine Data)

1
2
3
4

6
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-045

① ‘Chip name’
Type the chip name. Up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be typed.

② ‘Chip kind’
Choose the chip type.
Clicking opens <Select chip kind> window.

• To select the chip type, double-click the

illustration of the chip type, or click the
illustration then click [Select].

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-046

③ ‘Chip count’
Choose the number of chips per tape reel.
You can also type the number directly from a keyboard.

Page 4-20 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

④ ‘REF’
Choose the REF (reference No.) of the chip used for recognition.
Clicking opens <Select REF> window.
You can also type the number directly from a keyboard.

• Based on the target chip, shape, and notes,

choose the REF number and click [OK].

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-047 2

NOTICE
Wishing to gain the more detailed information about REF, double-click [HTML Help]
from [Help] in the toolbox. And you will see the detailed information about the chip
recognition. ( 6.2 HTML Help (Chip Recognition Information))

⑤ Chip dimensions
Type the chip length (L), width (W), and thickness (T).

W L

3Y3C-077E

⑥ ‘Extended data kind’ (Only for some chips)

For the chip with many pins (leads) or ball-like pins, the extended data needs to be created.
Choose the corresponding extended data type.

QFP : The chip with many pins (leads) at narrow pitches, such as QFP and SOP
( 4.2.8 Editing the QFP Extended Data)
BGA : The chip with many ball-like pins on its reverse side, such as BGA and CSP
( 4.2.9 Editing the BGA Extended Data)
FC : Not supported.
BARE : Not supported.

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-21

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.8 Editing the QFP Extended Data

T
How to start editing data
1. Set the extended data type at “QFP” in
the chip information.

• The (QFP) icon on the tool bar becomes

active.

2. Click (QFP) on the tool bar.

• The QFP extended data edit window opens.

• Clicking (Part) returns to the parts edit

window.
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-048

T
Editing the QFP extended data

2
1
3

4

Side information
 ‘Lead float check’ information
 Mounting load
 Pin information
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-049

① Side information
This shows the side number in the state that a chip is looked down at 0° of its packing style, The
bottom side is referred to as the 1st side, then the 2nd side, the 3rd side, and the 4th side
clockwise.

• The light-blue line indicates the side that is

being edited currently.
Clicking the pin illustration moves a cursor to
the pin pitch input field for that side.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-050

Page 4-22 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

② ‘Lead float check’ information

Edit the information about the lead float check.

<Lead float check>

Specify whether to check the lead float.
(To check the lead float, the optional lead checker is required on the machine.)
Selecting “Yes” changes the window as follows. Set the items displayed newly.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-049

1)

2)

3)

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-095

No. Name Function

1) ‘IC type for laser recognition’ Choose the IC type to distinguish with the laser recognition.
2) ‘Lead float Max’ Type to what length of float will be allowable for mounting.
The chip exceeding the tolerance will not be mounted.
3) ‘Laser scanning’ Type where to check the lead float, measured from the pin tip.
(Input this for each side.)

9Q4C-037E

③ Mounting load
Type what load will be applied for mounting.

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-23

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

④ Pin information
For each pin, specify the pin pitch, scanning position, virtual pins, and missing pin information.
Be sure to set these on each side.

<Pin pitch>
Type the length between pins.

9Q4C-038E

<Virtual pins, and missing pin entry>

Normally, the leads of the same width are lined at the same pitches; however some chips are
lined as follows.

9Q4C-039E
Missing lead is designed. Radiator is located in between Frame mark is located in
leads. between leads.

In such cases, the program shall be set not to search for the lead tips at those positions during
image processing. Therefore, register the position where leads do not exist or where something
other than leads exists, as “missing pin.”
When you register the position of missing pin, the notion of “virtual pins” is used.

9Q4C-040E
Suppose there is a virtual lead Suppose there are virtual Suppose there is a virtual lead
at the position of missing pin. leads at the position of at the position of frame mark.
radiator.

Suppose there are leads at the same pitches even if some leads are missing. The line of the
leads including these virtual leads is referred to as “virtual pins.” Among them, the leads that
actually exist are referred to as “actual pins.” (Actual pins = Virtual pins – Missing pins)
Now register the missing pin positions.

Setting procedure for virtual pins and missing pin positions

1. Input the number of pins supposing there are pins at the missing pin positions.
2. Double-click at the missing pin position.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-051
1) 2)

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-052

The missing pin is registered, and the number of actual pins will decrease by that of missing pins.

Page 4-24 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.9 Editing the BGA Extended Data

THow to start editing data
1. Set the extended data type at “BGA” in
the chip information.

• The (BGA) icon on the tool bar becomes

active.

2. Click (BGA) on the tool bar.

• The BGA extended data edit window opens.

• Clicking (Part) returns to the parts edit

window.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-053

T
Editing the BGA extended data

2

Selected ball position
3 5
 Ball count per column, Ball count per row
 ‘Ball pitch’
4  ‘Load’
 Ball area select/arrangement display field
6  Ball arrangement setting

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-054

① Selected ball position

Displays the selected ball position by using the row and column. (The lower-left corner indicates
the 1st row and 1st column.)
When an area is selected, its initial point is displayed.

② Ball count per column, Ball count per row

Input the number of balls on the column and row each. (Up to 50)
The ball positions of BGA and CSP are indicated by the combination of row and column numbers.
When you look down at the balls of BGA/CSP with the index corner located at the lower left, a
horizontal line is called “column” and a vertical one “row.”
Column
8
7
6
5
Row No. 4 Row
3
2
1
12345678

Column No. Fig.1

9Q4C-041E

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-25

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

③ ‘Ball pitch’
Type the length between balls.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-056

④ ‘Load’
Type what load will be applied for mounting.

⑤ Ball area select/arrangement display field

Select the area of the balls to be arranged. The arrangement setting result is displayed in real
time.

Area selecting procedure

a) Drag the mouse from the initial point to the end point.
3)

1) Initial point
2) 2) Drag
1) 3) End point

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-055

b) Click the initial point, then click [Shift] + End point.

2)

1) 1) Initial point
2) [Shift] + End point
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-055

Page 4-26 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

⑥ Ball arrangement setting

Set the arrangement of balls.

[Zigzag (1, 1) Ball]

When balls are staggered and one of them
exists at (1, 1), click this.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-057

[Zigzag (1, 1) No Ball]

When balls are staggered and one of them
does not exist at (1, 1), click this.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-058

[Clear Missing Balls]

When this is clicked, all the settings for the
missing balls and staggered arrangement are
cancelled, and then balls will be set on all rows
and columns.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-059 9Q4C-EPt-Pe-060

[Set balls to selected range]

To set balls in the area selected at “Ball area
select/arrangement display field,” click this.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-061 9Q4C-EPt-Pe-062

[Clear balls from selected range]

To delete balls in the area selected at “Ball
area select/arrangement display field,” click
this.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-063 9Q4C-EPt-Pe-064

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-27

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.10 Inputting the Commercial Parts Data

Describes how to input the commercial parts corresponding to the edited parts and select the
substitute parts.
∗ It is not always necessary to fill in these blanks. If needed, fill them in.
∗ The items input here are not displayed on the list screen.

2
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-065

① Maker name, Item code, Bar code

Type the maker name and product code of the parts to be mounted. (Up to three pairs can be
input.)
∗ The bar code will be supported in future. It does not need to be input.

② ‘Substitute parts’
Select the parts that substitute for the regular ones just in case.
(Up to two parts can be selected.)
Clicking opens the <Select parts> window; then select the parts.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-066

Page 4-28 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.11 Editing the Machine Data

Describes how to set the machine’s operating conditions and the nozzles.
∗ The items set here are not displayed on the list screen.

T
How to start editing the machine data

1. Click (Machine) on the tool bar, and

choose a module.

• Clicking (Part) returns to the parts edit

window.
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-067

T
Editing the machine data

2 5
3
1 6

4 7
8

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-068

10

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-069

12

11

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-070

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-29

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

① Chip dimensions
(Length (L), width (W), and thickness (T))
It does not need to be input.
The values input in chip data editing or the ones loaded from the standard chip data are
displayed.

② ‘FeederSpeed’
Select the driving time of the feeder.
Normally, choose “Standard.”
If “2 times” is selected, the feeder will drive twice as long as the standard driving time that is set
for each feeder.

③ ‘Recog. Speed’
Select the speed of chip recognition.
Normally, choose “Auto.”
If recognition error occurs, choose “Middle Speed” or “Low Speed.”

④ ‘REF’
It does not need to be input.
The values input in chip data editing or the ones loaded from the standard chip data are
displayed.

⑤ ‘Pickup Holding’
Select the time period for which the head is kept lowered for pick-up.
Normally, choose “Standard.”
If the chip is large or pick-up error occurs, choose “2 times” or “4 times.”

⑥ ‘Mount Holding’
Select the time period for which the head is kept lowered for mounting.
Normally, choose “Standard.”
If the chip is large or mount error occurs, choose “2 times” or “4 times.”

⑦ ‘Read standard chip’

Load the standard chip data as a source. ( 4.2.4 Loading the Standard Chip Data)

Page 4-30 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

⑧ ‘Nozzle kind’
Set the nozzles to be used.

<Select the nozzle> window

[Add]
To add nozzles to the list, click this.
Clicking this opens <Select the nozzle>
window; then select the desired ones from this
window.

[Modify]
To change the nozzles on the list, click this.
When you select the nozzle to be changed and
click the button, <Select the nozzle> window
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-071 opens; select the desired ones from this
window.
Then the nozzle is replaced by the selected
data.

[Delete]
To delete the nozzles from the list, click this.
Before clicking it, select the nozzle to be
deleted.

[Simulation]
The pick-up state of the selected nozzle can be
simulated.
Before clicking it, select the nozzle.
The chip pick-up state is displayed with the
illustrations.

1) 3)

4)
2)

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-072

1) The chip size can be changed. (The changes are reflected on the chip dimensions.)
2)The center of the pick-up position can be changed. (The changes are reflected on the pick-up position.)
3)Shows a nozzle. (The displayed nozzle shape is different from the actual one.)
4)Shows a chip. (Only the outside shape is displayed.)

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-31

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

⑨ Position setting
Type the chip pick-up position and eject height.

‘PickUp Position’
Type the deviation from the chip center into X and Y fields.
(The X and the Y position can be confirmed by [Simulation] in .)
When the chip is convexo-concave, input data into Z field.

Deviation from the center

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-073

‘Eject height’
Type the height at which the feeder ejects a chip.

Eject height
4H4C-601E

⑩ Lamp setting

‘Vacuum sensor check’

Specify whether to enable the vacuum sensor check.
When this is enabled, whether a chip has been picked up or not is judged by comparing the
vacuum pressure at which it has not been picked up with that at which picked up.

Low: Not picked up → Vacuum pressure low High: Picked up → Vacuum pressure high

4H4C-616E

Page 4-32 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

⑪ Other settings

‘MntSpeed’
Select the speed of mounting.
Normally, select 100 (maximum speed); if the precision is not satisfied, select a little lower value.

‘PUpSpeed’
Select the speed of pick-up.
Normally, select 100 (maximum speed); if the precision is not satisfied, select a little lower value.

‘Pickup gap’
Type the nozzle height at which the chip is picked up.
When 0 has been set, the chip is picked up at the height that it touches the tape or tray. When
plus (+) value has been set, it is picked up at the height that it is pressed into the tape or tray;
when minus (−) value has been set, it is picked up at the height that the nozzle does not touch
the chip.

444C-626E
Pick-up gap = 0 Pick-up gap = 0.5 Pick-up gap = −0.1

‘Mount gap’
Type the nozzle height at which the chip is mounted.
When 0 has been set, the chip is mounted at the height that it touches the board. When plus (+)
value has been set, it is mounted at the height that it is pressed into the board; when minus (−)
value has been set, it is mounted at the height that it does not touch the board.

9Q4C-011E
Mount gap = 0 Mount gap = 0.5 Mount gap = −0.1

⑫ [Tray registration]

Set the information about the tray. ( 4.2.12 Editing the Tray Data)
This is displayed only when “Tray” is chosen in the feeder type field in the feeder information.

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-33

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.12 Editing the Tray Data

Clicking [Tray registration] while editing the machine data opens <Tray data details> window. Set
the information about the tray.
After edited, click [OK] to close the window.
∗ [Tray registration] is displayed only when “Tray” is chosen in the feeder type field in the feeder
information.

1 2

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-074
5

① ‘Tray’
Type the name of the tray to be registered.

② ‘TrayOuterSize’
Type the tray dimensions and the maximum number of trays that can be used.

③ ‘PickUpPoint’/’Chip count’
‘FirstPickUpPoint’ (X, Y)
Type the position where the first chip is picked up.

‘LastPickUpPoint’ (X, Y)
Type the position where the last chip is picked up.

‘Chip count’ (X, Y)

Type the number of chips on the X- and the Y-axis each.

④ ‘Speed Data’
‘LifterSpeed’
Select the speed to move the tray up and down.

‘DrawingSpeed’
Select the speed to draw out the tray pallet from the feeder.

Page 4-34 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

⑤ [Pattern Edit]
Clicking [Pattern Edit] opens the window used to edit the chip arrangement on the tray.
After edited, click [OK] to close the window.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-075

‘Chip count’ (X, Y)

Type the number of chips on the X- and the Y-axis each.
The values input in  are displayed by default.

Chip area select/arrangement display field

Select the area of the chips to be arranged. The arrangement setting result is displayed in real
time.

Area selecting procedure

a) Drag the mouse from the initial point to the end point.

3)
1)
2)

1) Initial point
2) Drag
3) End point
9Q4C-EPt-Pe-078

b) Click the initial point, then click [Shift] + End point.

2)
1)

1) Initial point
2) [Shift] + End point

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-078

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-35

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

‘Zigzag (1, 1) Parts Yes’

When chips are staggered and one of them
exists at (1, 1), click this.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-076

‘Zigzag (1, 1) Parts No’

When chips are staggered and one of them
does not exist at (1, 1), click this.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-077

‘Set Parts Yes in selected range’

To set chips in the selected area, click this.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-080 9Q4C-EPt-Pe-081

‘Set Parts No in selected range’

To delete chips in the selected area, click this.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-078 9Q4C-EPt-Pe-079

‘Clear Parts Missing’

When this is clicked, all the settings for the
missing chips and staggered arrangement are
cancelled, and then chips will be set in the
whole area.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-082 9Q4C-EPt-Pe-083

Page 4-36 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

 4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

4.2.13 Exit and Save

T
Exit after saving
1. Click (Save) on the tool bar.

• The parts data is saved and the list screen is

displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-084

2. Choose “Refresh” from “Display” on the

menu bar.

• The saved data is displayed on the list screen.

∗ This step is just for confirmation.

Even without this step, the data is saved.

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-085

T
Exit without saving
1. Click (Close) on the tool bar.

• Even if one data is changed, the warning

message appears.

• When nothing is changed, the screen returns

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-086 to the list screen.

2. Click [No].
• The screen returns to the list screen without
saving the data.

• To save, click [Yes].

9Q4C-EPt-Pe-087

9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00 Page 4-37

4.2 Parts Library Entry/Edit (Parts Library Editor)

= MEMO =

Page 4-38 9Q4C-E-PMD04-A02-00

5.

5. VIRTUAL LINE

PT can set the virtual line for the line to be introduced in the near future, the line layout changing,
and the like. Setting the virtual line lets you do the following.
∗ Simulating the production tact assuming the line is changed
∗ Simulating the production tact assuming a new line is introduced
∗ Simulating the production tact for the case of the mounting on another existing line
∗ Creating the production data for the case of the production on another plant’s line
, etc.

9Q4C-E-PMD05-A00-00 Page 5-1

5.1 Virtual Line Setup
5.

5.1 Virtual Line Setup

You can set the virtual line for the line to be introduced in future or the one whose configuration
will be changed.
∗ You can set more than one virtual line.

NOTICE
Only the our standard machines or the existing ones can be set in the virtual line.
Feeding devices (feeder, tray, etc.) and special specifications, such as input range,
are not supported.

5.1.1 Starting the Virtual Line Setup

To start the virtual line setup, double-click “Imagination Line Config” icon from [Tool] in the menu
box.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-001

5.1.2 Virtual Line Setting Window

1
2

?
The virtual lines that have been set
@
Adds a new virtual line.
A
Deletes the selected virtual line.
B
Displays the details of the selected virtual
line.
9Q4C-EPt-Vl-014

Page 5-2 9Q4C-E-PMD05-A01-00

 5.1 Virtual Line Setup

5.1.3 Virtual Line Setting Procedure

1. Click [Add].
• <Input Line> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-001

2. Type the line name and click [OK].

• <Module setting> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-002

3. Click [Add machine].

• <Machine configuration> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-003

4. Type the machine name.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-004

To the next page

9Q4C-E-PMD05-A01-00 Page 5-3

5.1 Virtual Line Setup

5. Select the machine type and click [OK].

• The confirmation message appears.

∗ When selecting the machine type that exists

on the actual line, you need to select the
machine information setting.
( TMachine information setting selection)

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-005

6. Click [OK].
• The machine is registered onto the line.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-006

7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to register all the

machines composing the line.

• You can drag and drop the machines to

change the order.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-009

8. Click [Add new module].

• When there are no module-support machines,
skip this step.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-010

To the next page

Page 5-4 9Q4C-E-PMD05-A01-00

 5.1 Virtual Line Setup

9. Type the module name, and drag and

drop the machines to compose the
module.

• To compose two or more modules, repeat

steps 8 to 9.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-011

10. Click [OK].

• <Set the drive> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-012

11. Select the drive for entry (saving) and

click [OK].

• The virtual line is registered.

1 • If little space is available on the hard disk

where PT is installed, select another drive.

2
9Q4C-EPt-Vl-013

12. Click [OK].

• The virtual line setup is complete.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-014

9Q4C-E-PMD05-A01-00 Page 5-5

5.1 Virtual Line Setup

T
Machine information setting selection
When selecting the machine type that exists on the actual line in step 5, you need to select the
machine information setting.

After selecting the machine type, clicking [OK] opens <Selection of Machine configuration
information> window. Select the settings to the machine.

1 2

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-008

① ‘Line’
Displays the line name composed actually.

② ‘Management’
Displays the machine type that manages the line.

③ Machine selection window

Click a pull-down button to select the corresponding machine.
∗ When “Master” is selected, each machine’s setting becomes common.

④ Setup information list

Displays all selectable machine information settings.
∗ The contents depend on the machine type. (The above figure shows the case of CM202-D.)

Page 5-6 9Q4C-E-PMD05-A01-00

 5.2 Virtual Filer

5.2 Virtual Filer

The virtual filer creates the virtual files.

5.2.1 Starting the Virtual Filer

NOTICE
To launch the virtual filer, set the virtual line beforehand.

1. Double-click “Filer” icon from [Tool] in

the menu box.

• The filer is launched.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-001

2. Choose “Virtual line” from [Tool] on the

menu bar.

• The virtual filer is launched.

∗ When more than one virtual line is set, the

virtual filer of the line that was set last is
launched.
To select another line, do the line switching.
( 5.2.3 Virtual Filer Specific Functions)

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-015

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-016

9Q4C-E-PMD05-A01-00 Page 5-7

5.2 Virtual Filer

5.2.2 Virtual Filer Function List (Compared with Filer)

The virtual filer is the same as the filer in terms of the basic functions.
This part describes the functions that depend on the filer.

T
Differences in the menu bar
“File” : The same for both
“Edit” : The same for both
“View”
Filer Virtual filer

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-008

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-018

The virtual filer can do the settings about the lines.

“Tool”
Filer Virtual filer

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-019

The virtual filer does not have the functions about

the communication with machines and the data
copy.

9Q4C-EPt-Fi-007

“Help” : The same for both

T
Differences in the display area
Folder display area of virtual filer Folder display area of filer

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-017

The virtual filer does not display the lines in the folder display
9Q4C-EPt-Fi-113
area.
The other display areas are the same for both filers.

Page 5-8 9Q4C-E-PMD05-A01-00

 5.2 Virtual Filer
Page 5- 9

5.2.3 Virtual Filer Specific Functions

Describes the functions that only the virtual filer has and the filer does not.
∗ For the same functions as the filer, ( 2. FILER)

T
Line switching
When more than one virtual line is set, the virtual filer can switch the virtual lines.

1. Choose “Line change” from “View” on

the menu bar.

• <Change virtual line> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-020

2. Select the line to be switched, and click

[Change].

• Clicking [Details] lets you view the machine

settings of that line.
1 2

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-021

• The line is switched to the selected one ?.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-022

9Q4C-E-PMD05-A01-00 Page 5-9

5.2 Virtual Filer

T
Machine settings display
You can view the machine settings of the line currently selected.

1. Choose “Machine set display” from

“View” on the menu bar.

• <Display the machine configuration> window

opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-023

• Clicking [Close] closes the window.

9Q4C-EPt-Vl-024

Page 5-10 9Q4C-E-PMD05-A01-00

 5.3 Creating the Virtual Data

5.3 Creating the Virtual Data

Describes the virtual data creating procedure.
The procedure is the same as the data creation on an actual line. So this section describes only
the flow.
For further information, refer to “2. FILER” and the “Programming Manual (Editors).”

1. Create new lots and files on the virtual filer. ( 2.2 Creating a New PT File)

2. Start the editor. ( 2.2 Creating a New PT File)

3. Edit the data. ( Refer to the Programming Manual

(Editors))

4. Save the data and exit the editor. ( Refer to the Programming Manual
(Editors))

9Q4C-E-PMD05-A01-00 Page 5-11

5.4 Simulation

5.4 Simulation
PT lets you simulate how the mounting will be carried out based on the created virtual data.
This section describes the simulation flow after the data is created.
For further information, refer to the “Programming Manual (Line Converter).”

1. Start the line converter.

2. Import the data into the virtual line.

3. Start the editor of the line converter.

4. Apportion and then simulate the data.

Simulation under the other conditions

Simulation is complete.
5. Export the data to the virtual line of On the line converter, change the PCB data
PT. or the conditions for apportionment.

Return to the virtual filer and the virtual line setup,

then change the configuration of the line or the
modules.

Page 5-12 9Q4C-E-PMD05-A01-00

6.

6. HELP

The following three tools are in the Help box.

(The features, Supplementary explanation and HTML Help, are supported for Japanese version
only.)
∗ Supplementary explanation
Describes the operations that are not described in the manual. Read them once.
The contents vary with the PT versions.

∗ Ver. display
Displays and prints the PT system information.
Use this to check the version and the contents of the system in maintenance or adjustment.

∗ HTML Help (Chip Recognition Information)

Supplies the information of the chip recognition in HTML format.
Use this for the REF setting for the chip recognition, and the others.

9Q4C-E-PMD06-A00-00 Page 6-1

6.1 Outline of Version Display
6.

6.1 Outline of Version Display

6.1.1 Starting the Version Display
Double-clicking “Version” icon from Help in the menu box opens <PTSystemInfo> window.

9Q4C-EPt-Hp-001

6.1.2 Screen of Version Display

When you start the version display, <PTSystemInfo> window opens. (Contents of display vary.)

3
9Q4C-EPt-Hp-003

Page 6-2 9Q4C-E-PMD06-A01-00

 6.1 Outline of Version Display

① Print button
The printer driver window opens. After the print setup, data are printed out.

② Version display area

The file names, renewal dates, sizes, and versions in the PT system file are displayed. When
you click the upper button, each item is sorted in alphabetical order, etc.

E.g.)

9Q4C-EPt-Hp-003 9Q4C-EPt-Hp-004 9Q4C-EPt-Hp-003

Version field
Newer : New version (Indicates the file version is newer than the system version.)
Matched : Current version (Indicates the file version is the same as the system version.)
Older : Old version (Indicates the file version is older than the system version.)

③ Status bar
The explanation of the icon pointed by a pointer is displayed.

④ System version
The PT system version is displayed.

9Q4C-E-PMD06-A01-00 Page 6-3

6.1 Outline of Version Display

= MEMO =

Page 6-4 9Q4C-E-PMD06-A01-00

7.

7. MAINTENANCE

The following three tools are in the Maintenance box.

∗ Unlock
This exists in the menu box of the shell and is used against the trouble in editor operation.

∗ CM20X/301 system installer

Installs the system of the modular-type chip mounter from PT.

∗ PT200 conversion tool

Allows the data of PT100 to be used on PT200.

9Q4C-E-PMD07-A00-00 Page 7-1

7.1 Unlock
7.

7.1 Unlock
7.1.1 About Unlock
If the system is improperly shut down during data editing on each machine editor (e.g., it is
stopped owing to a power failure, shut down forcibly, or the like), or if an editor is improperly
operated or closed owing to the trouble in editing, the editor may not be started because the data
file is locked. The unlock function unlocks the data to start the editor.
∗ If the other editors are launched, the data cannot be unlocked. Before using the unlock function,
close them.

7.1.2 Unlock Procedure

1. Double-click “UnLock” icon from
[Maintenance] in the menu box.

• <UnLock> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Me-001

2. Click [OK].
• The data is unlocked, then the window closes.

733C-EPt-Ul-001

Page 7-2 9Q4C-E-PMD07-A01-00

 7.2 CM20X/301 System Installer

7.2 CM20X/301 System Installer

7.2.1 About Installer
The CM20X/301 system installer is used to install the machine system from PT to the following
machines.

Applicable machines
N Modular-support high-speed mounters (CM20X-series machines)
N Modular-support multi-functional mounters (CM30X-series machines)
N Modular-support high-speed mounters (CM40X-series machines)

NOTICE
The machine system is supplied from CD-ROM.
To install the system, the machine installation disk (FD) is required.

7.2.2 Installation Procedure

1. Double-click “CM20X/301 Machine
Installer” icon from [Maintenance].

• <CM20X/301 Machine Installer> wizard

starts.

9Q4C-EPt-Me-001

2. Install the system following the

on-screen instructions.

• Follow the on-screen instructions and go on to

the next step by clicking [Next].

9Q4C-EPt-Me-004

9Q4C-E-PMD07-A01-00 Page 7-3

7.3 PT200 Conversion Tool

7.3 PT200 Conversion Tool

The PT200 conversion tool converts the data managed on the PT100 system to the PT200
system.

7.3.1 About PT200 Conversion Tool

NOTICE
Only the data of chip mounters are converted; the other machines’ are kept intact.

The following are carried out by conversion.

N
The format of the machine data is converted to the module-support, then copied to the virtual line.
N
The feeder layout list of the machine data is registered into the parts library.
N
Based on the machine data, the custom chip library is ported to the respective machines on the
virtual line.

9Q4C-019E

Page 7-4 9Q4C-E-PMD07-A01-00

 7.3 PT200 Conversion Tool

7.3.2 Conversion Procedure

NOTICE
Conversion procedure will take 15 to 20 minutes, depending on the machine data
volume.

1. Exit all tools, such as the filer and

editors.

2. Double-click “PT200 conversion tool”

icon from [Maintenance].

• <Data Shift Tool> wizard starts.

9Q4C-EPt-Me-001

3. Click [Next].

9Q4C-EPt-Me-005

To the next page

9Q4C-E-PMD07-A01-00 Page 7-5

7.3 PT200 Conversion Tool

4. Specify the save-destination file name

and drive name.

? Type the file name.

1 • The input file name is registered as the name

of the virtual line.

@ Select the desired drive.

2
5. Click [Next].
9Q4C-EPt-Me-009

6. Check the line configuration; if it is OK,

click [Execute].

• The data conversion starts.

• Clicking [Back] returns to the preceding

window.

9Q4C-EPt-Me-007

• During conversion, the window on the left

opens.

∗ It will take 15 to 20 minutes until conversion is

complete, depending on the machine data
volume.

• When conversion is complete, the message

asking whether to open the log file appears.

9Q4C-EPt-Me-008

To the next page

Page 7-6 9Q4C-E-PMD07-A01-00

 7.3 PT200 Conversion Tool

7. To open the log file, click [Yes].

• Exits the PT200 conversion tool and opens
the log file.

• Clicking [No] exits the PT200 conversion tool.

9Q4C-EPt-Me-010
• To close the log file, click the close box.

9Q4C-EPt-Me-011

9Q4C-E-PMD07-A01-00 Page 7-7

7.3 PT200 Conversion Tool

= MEMO =

Page 7-8 9Q4C-E-PMD07-A01-00

8.

8. USER MANAGEMENT

The NT user manager (one of the functions of Windows NT) and the PT user manager (one of
the PT-specific functions) manage the users who log onto PT.

NT user manager
This sets the authorities for the computer of the users. Group setting is available.
The setup of the PT user manager is based on the authorities of the NT user manager.

PT user manager
This sets the authorities for the applications of PT.
The operator and the engineer mode can be set.

∗ The serviceman mode is prepared for the system setup and troubleshooting.
Normally, this mode is not available. (The key disk is required.)

9Q4C-E-PMD08-A00-00 Page 8-1

8.1 Before Starting the User Managers
8.

8.1 Before Starting the User Managers

There are two user managers of PT: NT user manager and PT user manager.
Set them in the following order.

1. Use the NT user manager to set the

authorities about Windows NT.

9Q4C-EPt-Um-002

2. Next, use the PT user manager to set

the authorities about PT.

9Q4C-EPt-Um-003

Page 8-2 9Q4C-E-PMD08-A01-00

 8.2 NT User Manager

8.2 NT User Manager

NOTICE
• When logging onto the system, be sure to use “create” for both the user name and
the password.
• Never delete the user names, “create” and “installpt.”
If you do, the user management and the installation for the version upgrade will be
disabled.
• The user who has the knowledge of the Windows NT administration shall operate
the NT user manager.
• The setup procedure is the same as the user manager of the Windows NT.
Refer to the manual for Windows NT.

8.2.1 Starting the NT User Manager

To start the NT user manager, double-click “NT User manager” icon from [Setup] in the menu
box.

9Q4C-EPt-Um-001

8.2.2 Setting the NT User Manager

Set the manager in the same way as the user setup of the Windows NT.

9Q4C-EPt-Um-005

9Q4C-E-PMD08-A01-00 Page 8-3

8.3 PT User Manager

8.3 PT User Manager

NOTICE
• When logging onto the system, be sure to use “create” for both the user name and
the password.
• To set users on the PT user manager, the users shall be set on the NT user
manager beforehand.

8.3.1 Starting the PT User Manager

To start the PT user manager, double-click “PT User manager” icon from [Setup] in the menu
box.

9Q4C-EPt-Um-001

8.3.2 Main Screen of PT User Manager

1

9Q4C-EPt-Um-007

?
Select a mode.
@
Displays the user names that are set in the current mode.
A
Adds/Deletes users.

Page 8-4 9Q4C-E-PMD08-A01-00

 8.3 PT User Manager

8.3.3 Adding the Users

1. Select the mode you will add users in.
• The users list registered in the selected mode
are displayed.
1

2. Click [Add User].

• <User's registration> window opens and the
users list registered on the NT user manager
2 is displayed.
9Q4C-EPt-Um-008

3. Select the user you will register into PT,

and click [Select].

• <End> is affixed to the user that has already

been registered.

• <User's registration> window closes and the

1 user is registered.

9Q4C-EPt-Um-009
2

9Q4C-EPt-Um-010

9Q4C-E-PMD08-A01-00 Page 8-5

8.3 PT User Manager

8.3.4 Deleting the Users

1. Select the mode you will delete users
from.

• The users list registered in the selected mode

are displayed.

9Q4C-EPt-Um-008

2. Select the user you will delete.

1
3. Click [Delete User].
• <Delete User> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Um-010 2

4. Click [OK].
• <Delete User> window closes and the user is
deleted.

9Q4C-EPt-Um-011

9Q4C-EPt-Um-012

Page 8-6 9Q4C-E-PMD08-A01-00

9.

9. PROVIEWER

ProViewer is a software package that enables the user to open the production control
information, which used to be confined to the facility, as data file (in ASCII format).
These data files can freely be referred to from the other computers via an existing
network. Accordingly, based on the shared files, the user can implement a system
construction on any computer as occasion demands. Using the event file, for instance,
the user can construct a system to supervise the machine’s operations from a distance,
and with the production control information, to control the number of components that
were put in use, that of error occurrences, and much more. Furthermore, application of
the Internet to the network enables the user to conduct the work from remote locations.
∗ ProViewer is intended for those who can create Excel macros and Windows applications.

9Q4C-047E

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A00-00 Page 9-1

9.1 Functions of ProViewer and Supporting Machines
9.

9.1 Functions of ProViewer and Supporting Machines

9.1.1 Functions of ProViewer
This section describes the functions of ProViewer.

T
ASCII file output function
This automatically creates line configuration file, lot track record file, PT event file, machine event
file, production control information initial value file, production control information default file, and
machine data information file, as ASCII format files in real time.

T
Lot control function
This selects a lot definition that satisfies the user’s operational demands, and totalizes data in the
defined period of time.

T
Expiration function
This automatically deletes the obsolete file (one day’s worth of data) at a preset time.

T
Communications function
This transmits events to PV10S-G (ProViewer server package), which is sold separately, in real
time.

9.1.2 Supporting Machines

T
Machines that ProViewer supports
Printer SP22P-M, SP28P-M, SP28P-D
Dispenser BD30S-M
Rotary CM88C-M, CM88C-M1, CM88C-D, CM88S-M, CM88S-M1
Multi CM95R-M, CM100-M, CM20F-M, CM120-MU
Modular CM201-D, CM202-D, CM301-D, CM201-DH, CM202-DH, CM402-L

Page 9-2 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A01-00

 9.2 Configuration Window

9.2 Configuration Window

9.2.1 Starting the Configuration Settings
This part describes the operating procedure to open the <Proviewer Set up details> window.

1. Click [Setup (S)] in the PT shell.

• You can see the “ProViewer Config” icon.

2. Double-click the “ProViewer Config”

icon.
1
2

9Q4C-EPt-Pvc-002

• “Proviewer Set up details” window opens.

929C-EPv-087

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A01-00 Page 9-3

9.2 Configuration Window

9.2.2 Configuration Window

The below window opens when you start the ProViewer configuration settings. The current
settings are displayed when launched.

1 2

929C-EPv-087

5 6

No. Name Explanation

?‘Ascii File Output’ Use this to change the location of data retention.
( 9.2.3 ASCII File Output)
@‘Data Hold Days’ Use this to change the number of consecutive days of data retention.
( 9.2.5 Data Hold Days)
A‘Lot Kind’ Use this to change the lot type. ( 9.2.6 Lot Kind)
B‘Delete Time’ Use this to change the deletion time. ( 9.2.8 Delete Time)
C‘Generation Management’ Basically, when the time set in B Delete Time has passed, ASCII files will be
deleted automatically. As long as a generation number is registered in this
generation management, only the important files between those generations
will be protected and not be deleted.
( 9.2.9 Generation Management)
DButton ([Enter]/[Close]) [Enter] : Use this button to enable the changes.
[Close] : Use this button to discard the changes or to close the ProViewer
configuration setting window.
∗ To enable the changes, the system must be restarted.
(For information about restart, 9.2.10 Shutdown)

Page 9-4 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A01-00

 9.2 Configuration Window

9.2.3 ASCII File Output

The location where the data is output (saved) by ProViewer can be changed.
∗ When it is changed, the user-created data preceding the change is retained as is. ( 9.3.3
Directory Hierarchy / File Output, for the details of the directory hierarchy that retains data.)

1
929C-EPv-028

No. Name Explanation

?[Reference...] button Clicking this button opens the directory-selecting window ( Next page).
@Text box Key in to change the name.
Drive name: ¥Folder name 1¥Folder name 2
∗ Specify folders of Windows NT.

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A01-00 Page 9-5

9.2 Configuration Window

9.2.4 Directory-Selecting Window

This part describes the directory-selecting window.

9Q4C-EPt-Pvc-001

No. Name Explanation

?Button ([OK], [Cancel]) [OK] : It decides on the selected folder (the currently selected
folder).
[Cancel] : It cancels the directory-selecting window.
∗ When the directory is changed with a click of [OK], the information in the text
box of the ASCII file output concurrently changes.
@Directory selection Select a directory with a click of corresponding icon.
ADrive selection Select a drive with a click of a pull-down button .
BThe currently selected folder is
displayed.

Page 9-6 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A01-00

 9.2 Configuration Window

9.2.5 Data Hold Days

ProViewer is designed to automatically delete the created data. (Because the hard disk capacity
has an upper limit) With this function, a number of consecutive days the data is retained in the
PT can be specified. (Maximum holding days vary according to the customer's line configuration
and production pattern. Depending on circumstances, the ASCII file may not be created due to a
lack of hard disk space. The initial value is three days, however you can select the desired days.)

∗ The number at the time of installation (the default) is preset to retain three days’ worth of data.

929C-EPv-030

2 1

No. Name Explanation

?Spin buttons There are two spin buttons: upward and downward .
A click of upward button adds one to the current number of days.
A click of downward button subtracts one from the current number of days.
A change made with a click of either upward or downward button
concurrently changes the number in @ Text box.
@Text box The number of days can also be keyed in.

9.2.6 Lot Kind

The lot type can be changed in the range of types 1 through S5.
(For information about a lot definition, Next page)

929C-EPv-031

No. Name Explanation

?Radio button Select a radio button to change the lot type.
∗ Select only one type.

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A01-00 Page 9-7

9.2 Configuration Window

9.2.7 Lot Definition

A lot is a batch of associated items that are produced under the same conditions. The produced
lot differs among machines, and is defined as a batch of items produced in a specific segment of
the following production cycle.

∗ The below table describes the definition of the lots to be produced and those produced.

Primary conditions
No. Secondary conditions
Start End
1.Down/Upload Down/Upload
2.Down/Upload Production-end signal
3.Down/Upload Production-end signal Regard a Down/Upload – Down/Upload segment also
as the same lot.
4.Down/Upload Production-end signal Regard a Production-end signal – Production-end
signal segment also as the same lot.
5.Down/Upload Production-end signal Regard a Down/Upload – Down/Upload segment and a
Production-end signal – Production-end signal
segment also as the same lot.

T
Details by lot type
Data from start to end is defined as one lot.

Lot type 1
Lot start → Down/Upload of the machine data
Lot end → Down/Upload of the machine data

929C-EPv-032

Lot type 2
Lot start → Down/Upload of the machine data
Lot end → Production end signal

∗ If a download is done between Lot start and Lot end, regard the last download as the next Lot
start.
∗ If the production ends before Lot end, regard the first Production-end signal as Lot end.

929C-EPv-033

Page 9-8 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A01-00

 9.2 Configuration Window

Lot type 3
Lot start → Down/Upload of the machine data
Lot end → Production end signal

∗ If a download is done between Lot start and Lot end, regard the first download as Lot start.
∗ If the production ends before Lot end, regard the first Production-end signal as Lot end.

929C-EPv-034

Lot type 4
Lot start → Down/Upload of the machine data
Lot end → Production end signal

∗ If a download is done between Lot start and Lot end, regard the last download as the next Lot
start.
∗ If the production ends before Lot end, regard the last Production-end signal as Lot end.

929C-EPv-035

Lot type 5
Lot start → Down/Upload of the machine data
Lot end → Production end signal

∗ If a download is done between Lot start and Lot end, regard the first download as Lot start.
∗ If the production ends before Lot end, regard the last Production-end signal as Lot end.

929C-EPv-036

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A01-00 Page 9-9

9.2 Configuration Window

9.2.8 Delete Time

This function specifies a time to delete the data beyond the days of data retention.
∗ At the time of installation (By default), it is preset to delete data at 11 p.m.

929C-EPv-037

2 1

No. Name Explanation

?Spin buttons There are two spin buttons: upward and downward .
A click of upward button adds one to the current number of hours.
A click of upward button subtracts one from the current number of hours.
A change made with a click of either upward or downward button
concurrently changes the number in @ Text box.
@Text box The time can also be keyed in.

9.2.9 Generation Management

Basically, when the time set in B Delete Time has passed, ASCII files will be deleted
automatically. The generation mentioned herein is the lot defined in A Lot Kind. As long as the
number of days is specified in the generation management, the following files within the specified
generations will be protected and not be deleted.

1. Lot achievement file

2. Final production control information file in a lot
3. Production control information initial value file
4. Machine data information file

929C-EPv-088
2 1

No. Name Explanation

?Operation setting button Set whether to manage generation or not.
@Setting count button Set how many generations will be protected by the generation management.

Page 9-10 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A01-00

 9.2 Configuration Window

9.2.10 Shutdown
If the ProViewer configuration settings are changed, the system requires a reboot to enable the
changes.
Clicking [Enter] on the setting window opens <ShutDown> window.

929C-EPv-038
2 1

No. Name Explanation

?[Cancel] button The system does not reboot.
∗ When [Enter] is clicked without having the configuration changed, click
[Cancel] because the system does not require a reboot.
@[OK] button The system reboots.
∗ Click [OK], or else the system does not reboot and not enable the
configuration changes.

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A01-00 Page 9-11

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications
9.

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

9.3.1 Outline of File Specifications
This part describes the ASCII file specifications in ProViewer.
The table below shows the names and the outline of the files generated by ProViewer.

No. File name Outline

1Line configuration file Information on the current line configuration
This file describes the line configuration.
2Lot track record file Track record of the produced lots
This file informs the start and the end time of the produced lots.
3PT event file PT event information
This file describes the events that PT generates.
4Machine event file Machine event information
This file describes the events that machines generate.
5Production control information Production control information for each board production
file This file details troubles and errors of machines.
6Production control information This is the initial-value file for the calculation of an accurate value of each lot.
initial value file
7Machine data information file Unit/Nozzle-related information, Chip information, Board information, Mask
recognition information
The component/feeder/nozzle/board information for each lot and the
coordinates data for each chip can be inspected.

Page 9-12 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

9.3.2 Timing of Generation and Deletion, and Naming Criteria

The table below shows the timing of generation and deletion as well as the naming criteria for
ASCII files.

No. File type Generation timing Deletion timing Naming criterion (File name)
1 Line configuration Events on the changes of line Automatic [YYYYMMDDHHmmSS] .lin
file configuration ∗ Set the number of
days and hours.
2 Lot track record file This varies with a lot definition. Automatic [YYYYMMDDHHmmSS] .lon
Down/Upload, Production-end ∗ Set the number of
signal, or Production control days and hours.
information clear event
3 PT event file Once in every 25 seconds or PT Automatic [YYYYMMDDHHmmSS] .pev
ring buffer FULL ∗ Set the number of
∗ No output for no event days and hours.
4 Machine event file Once in every 25 seconds or PT Automatic [YYYYMMDDHHmmSS] .mev
ring buffer FULL ∗ Set the number of
∗ No output for no event days and hours.
5 Production control Event at completion of each board Automatic [YYYYMMDDHHmmSS] .pro
information file production ∗ Set the number of
days and hours.
6 Production control This varies with a lot definition. Automatic [YYYYMMDDHHmmSS] .ini
information initial Down/Upload, Production-end ∗ Set the number of
value file signal, or Production control days and hours.
information clear event
7 Machine data Down/Upload Automatic [YYYYMMDDHHmmSS] .mcd
information file ∗ Set the number of
days and hours.

∗ Setting of the number of days and hours in the deletion timing represents the number of
consecutive days and hours specified in ( 9.2.8 Delete Time).

∗ [YYYYMMDDHHmmSS] in the naming criteria represents;

YYYY = year, MM = month, DD = day, HH = hour, mm = minute, SS = second

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-13

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

9.3.3 Directory Hierarchy / File Output

1. Directory hierarchy
The table below shows the hierarchy of the directory.

929C-002E

∗ PVCDataPath represents the ASCII file output destination specified by the ProViewer settings.
∗ [M] in Machine [M] represents M in H.L.M. in the line configuration file.
(Example: Machine 3)
The same number of Machine [M] directories exist as the number of signed-on machines.
∗ [N] in Stage [N] represents the stage No.
This exists for the NCM models only. (E.g.: Stage 1)
∗ H, L, and M stand for Host, Line, and Machine respectively; and one number is assigned to
each of the alphabets.
H is a PT’s number, L is a line number, and M represents a serial number assigned to each
machine that is signed on the line.

2. File output
The table below shows the directory hierarchy by file.

Directory hierarchy 1 Directory hierarchy 2 Directory hierarchy 3 Directory hierarchy 4

[D] PVCDataPath [D] Line Line configuration file
[D] Event PT event file
Lot track record file
Machine event file
Production control information file
[D] Machine
Production control information
initial value file
Machine data information file
Production control information file
[D] Stage [N] Production control information
initial value file

∗ [D] represents a directory.

[N] represents the number of stages.

Page 9-14 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

9.3.4 Common Record Specifications

This part describes ASCII file data format in ProViewer.

A) Common record specifications (Data format)

1. If a line has “#” at the beginning, the line is a comment.
2. No comment starts at some midpoint in a line.
3. All data is on a one-record-per-line basis and ends with a linefeed code (0x0a).
4. Data is sectionalized by information.
One record completes within 1024 byte including the linefeed code.
5. Data format has two types.
In one format, there are key names that stand for values; in another format, figures are delimited
with a comma (,).
The comma always comes between figures; if comma consecutively continues, it suggests that a
figure may be added at a later time or the existing information may be overwritten.
6. If a figure has (a) comma(s) in itself, the figure is bracketed with a double-quote (“ ”).

B) Common record specifications (Section format)

1. A section starts with a [name]. No identifier is assigned to indicate the end of a section.
2. A section completes when the next section starts or when the file ends.
3. [Index] section is placed at the head.
4. A section does not exist within another section.

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-15

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

9.3.5 Record Specifications by File

NOTICE
As for the key whose "Range" field is blank in the table, the effective range of "Type"
is regarded as the range.

1. Line configuration file

TSection specifications
No. Section name Stands for
1 [Index] Index section
2 [Controller] Facility controller section
3 [Line] Line section
4 [Machine (M)] Machine section (Example: Machine3)

TRecord specifications
[Index] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Format= Data format version STRING 9 characters Use LineConfig.
2 Version= Minor version in the FLOAT 001~999
same format
3 Machine= Target model STRING 9 characters Use ProViewer.
4 Date= Date of output STRING 20 characters Example: “1999/07/01,12:12:12”
5 AuthorType= Type of the system that STRING 7 characters Use the facility controller name PT200.
created data
6 Author= Name of the system that STRING 128 characters Use the host computer name.
created data

<Example>
Format=LineConfig
Version=001
Machine=ProViewer
Date= “1999/07/01,12:12:12”
AuthorType=PT200
Author=SIRIUS

Page 9-16 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Controller] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 HostName= Host name STRING 128 characters DNS host name used for TCP/IP
2 IPAddress= IP address STRING 15 characters IP address of facility controller
3 Subnet= Subnet address STRING 15 characters Subnet address of facility controller
4 HLM= HLM STRING 15 characters Fix M of the host computer at 0 as the
figures for H and L indicate the
information.
5 PVCROOT= RootPath for ProViewer STRING 128 characters
system
6 PVCDataPath RootPath for ProViewer STRING 128 characters
file output
7 PVCWorkPath= RootPath for ProViewer STRING 128 characters
workspace

<Example>
HostName=Sirius
IPAddress=179.101.100.210
Subnet=255.255.128.0
HLM=1.1.0
PVCROOT=c:¥ pv
PVCDataPath=c:¥ pv¥ Data
PVCWorkPath=c:¥ Pt200¥ PVSystem¥ tmp

[Line] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 LineName= Line name STRING 128 characters Line name
2 MachineNumber= Number of signed-on BYTE 1~32 Designate one from 1 through 32
machines

<Example>
LineName=Line1
MachineNumber=5

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-17

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Machine(M)] section (M stands for the M number in HLM)

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 HostName= Host name STRING 128 characters DNS host name used for TCP/IP
2 IPAddress= IP address STRING 15 characters IP address of machine
3 Subnet= Subnet address STRING 15 characters Subnet address of machine
4 Relation= Main/Subordinate BYTE 1~2 (1 as the main or 2 as the sub)
relation in optical
communications
5 PortChanel= Port channel in optical BYTE 0~15 (0-15)
communications
6 Name= User-defined name of STRING 128 characters It is always a unique name in one line.
machine
7 PreMachine= Name of machine STRING 128 characters “Name” substitutes.
located at the previous
process
8 PostMachine= Name of machine STRING 128 characters “Name” substitutes.
located at the next
process
9 ManageName= Name to identify model STRING 128 characters
for FaSock
10 MDLN= Model identifier for DWORD 00000~
FaSock 99999
11 HLM= HLM STRING 15 characters Fix M of the host computer at 0 as the
figures for H and L indicate the
information.

<Example>
HostName=SP20
IPAddress=179.101.100.211
Subnet=255.255.128.0
Relation=1
PortChanel=3
Name=SP22-A
PreMachine=None
PostMachine=SP20-A
ManageName=SP20
MDLN=31100
HLM=0.1.1

Page 9-18 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

2. Lot achievement file

TSection specifications

No. Section name Stands for

1 [Index] Index section
2 [Lot] Lot section
3 [Start] Start section
4 [Init] Initialization section
5 [End] End section

TRecord specifications
[Index] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Format= Data format version STRING 3 characters Use Lot.
2 Version= Minor version in the FLOAT 001~999
same format
3 Machine= Target model STRING 9 characters Use ProViewer.
4 Date= Date of output STRING 20 characters Example: “1999/07/01,12:12:12”
5 AuthorType= Type of the system that STRING 7 characters Use the facility controller name PT200.
created data
6 Author= Name of the system that STRING 128 characters Use the host computer name.
created data

<Example>
Format=Lot
Version=001
Machine=ProViewer
Date=“1999/07/01,12:12:12”
AuthorType=PT200
Author=SIRIUS

[Lot] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Group Group name STRING 20 characters
2 LotName Lot name STRING 20 characters Lot name
3 LotNum Lot number STRING 20 characters Normally the number is 0.
4 PTFileName Data name on the facility STRING 20 characters
controller (PT/LC)
5 Version Data version DOUBLE
6 MCFileName Data name on the machine STRING 20 characters
7 Mpoint Total mount points DWORD

<Example>
Group,LotName,LotNum,PTFileName,Version,MCName,Mpoint
“WORK”, “Lot1”,1, “PTData1”,0.01, “PCBord.dat”,500

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-19

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Start] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Date= Starting date STRING 20 characters Example: “1999/07/01,12:12:12”

<Example>
Date=“1999/07/01,12:12:12”

[Init] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Date= Starting date STRING 20 characters Example: “1999/07/01,12:12:13”
“1999/07/01,12:12:14”

<Example>
Date=“1999/07/01,12:12:13”
Date=“1999/07/01,12:12:14”

[End] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Date= Ending date STRING 20 characters Example: “1999/07/01,12:12:15:00”

<Example>
Date=“1999/07/01,12:12:15”

Page 9-20 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

3. PT event file
TSection specifications

No. Section name Stands for

1 [Index] Index section
2 [Controller] Facility controller section
3 [Event] Event section

TRecord specifications
[Index] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Format= Data format version STRING 9 characters Use PTLCEvent.
2 Version= Minor version in the FLOAT 001~999
same format
3 Machine= Target model STRING 9 characters Use ProViewer.
4 Date= Date of output STRING 20 characters Example: “1999/07/01,12:12:12”
5 AuthorType= Type of the system that STRING 7 characters Use the facility controller name PT200.
created data
6 Author= Name of the system that STRING 128 characters Use the host computer name.
created data

<Example>
Format=PTLCEvent
Version=001
Machine=ProViewer
Date=“1999/07/01,12:12:12”
AuthorType=PT200
Author=SIRIUS

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-21

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Controller] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 HostName= Host name STRING 128 characters DNS host name used for TCP/IP
2 IPAddress= IP address STRING 15 characters IP address of facility controller
3 Subnet= Subnet address STRING 15 characters Subnet address of facility controller
4 HLM= HLM STRING 15 characters Fix M of the host computer at 0 as the
figures for H and L indicate the
information.
5 PVCROOT= RootPath for ProViewer STRING 128 characters
system
6 PVCDataPath= RootPath for ProViewer STRING 128 characters
file output
7 PVCWorkPath= RootPath for ProViewer STRING 128 characters
workspace

<Example>
HostName=Sirius
IPAddress=179.101.100.210
Subnet=255.255.128.0
HLM=1.1.0
PVCROOT=c:¥ pv
PVCDataPath=c:¥ pv¥ Data
PVCWorkPath=c:¥ Pt200¥ PVSystem

[Event] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Date= Date of output STRING 20 characters See below.
2 MainCode Main event code WORD 00~FF
3 SubCode Sub event code WORD 000000~
FFFFFF
4 MainSubject Information of main STRING 256 characters
event
5 SubSubject Information of sub event STRING 256 characters

<Example>
Date,MainCode,SubCode,MainSubject,SubSubject
“1999/07/01,12:12:12”,03,000030, “FASOCK communication error”,“Timeout occurred in
communications with the machine”
“1999/07/01,12:12:13”,03,000032, “FASOCK communication error”,“Connection failed in
communications with the machine”

Page 9-22 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

4. Machine event file

TSection specifications

No. Section name Stands for

1 [Index] Index section
2 [Event] Event section

TRecord specifications
[Index] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Format= Data format version STRING 12 characters Use MachineEvent.
2 Version= Minor version in the FLOAT 001~999
same format
3 Machine= Target model STRING 9 characters Use ProViewer.
4 Date= Date of output STRING 20 characters Example: “1999/07/01,12:12:12”
5 AuthorType= Type of the system that STRING 7 characters Use the facility controller name PT200.
created data
6 Author= Name of the system that STRING 128 characters Use the host computer name.
created data

<Example>
Format=MachineEvent
Version=001
Machine=ProViewer
Date=“1999/07/01,12:12:12”
AuthorType=PT200
Author=SIRIUS

[Event] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Date= Date of output STRING 20 characters See below.
2 MainCode Main event code WORD 00~FF
3 SubCode Sub event code WORD 000000~
FFFFFF
4 MainSubject Information of main STRING 256 characters
event
5 SubSubject Information of sub event STRING 256 characters

<Example>
Date,MainCode,SubCode,MainSubject,SubSubject
“1999/07/01,12:12:12”,03,110000, “in automatic operation”,“system in automatic operation”
“1999/07/01,12:12:12”,03,110001, “in automatic operation”,“system out of automatic operation”
“1999/07/01,12:12:12”,03,120000, “latency for preceding process”,“system latency for preceding
process”
“1999/07/01,12:12:12”,03,120001, “latency for preceding process”,“system out of latency for
preceding process”

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-23

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

5. Production control information file

TSection specifications
Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 [Index] Index section







2 [Information] Information section - - - - -

3 [General.Time] Time section






4 [General.Count] Count section






5 [General.Count.BDCN] Bond dispensing point count
-
 - - - -
section
6 [Stop.Time] Stop time section






7 [Stop.Time.FRWait] Process waiting time section






8 [Stop.Time.SCWait] Worker waiting time section






9 [Stop.Time.SupplyWait] Material supply waiting time







section
10 [Stop.Time.Error] Emergency stop time section






11 [Stop.Count] Stop count section






12 [Stop.Count.FRWait] Process waiting count section - - -
 -

13 [Stop.Count.SCWait] Worker waiting count section






14 [Stop.Count.SupplyWait] Material supply waiting count
-





section
15 [Stop.Count.Error] Emergency stop count section




 -
16 [Takeup.UnitNozzle] Pick-up data (by unit/nozzle)
- - - - -

section
17 [Takeup.UnitNozzleStocker] Pick-up data (by unit/nozzle
- - - - -

stocker) section
18 [Takeup.UnitNozzleChanger] Pick-up data (by unit/nozzle
- - - - -

changer) section
19 [Takeup.Unit] Pick-up data (by unit) section - -


 -
20 [Takeup.Nozzle] Pick-up data (by nozzle) section - - -

 -
21 [Miss.UnitNozzle] Miss data (by unit/nozzle) section - -
 - -

22 [Miss.UnitNozzleStocker] Miss data (by unit/nozzle stocker)
- - - - -

section
23 [Miss.UnitNozzleChanger] Miss data (by unit/nozzle
- - - - -

changer) section
24 [Miss.Unit] Miss data (by unit) section - -


 -
25 [Miss.Nozzle] Miss data (by nozzle) section - -


 -
26 [PasteMskRecog] Solder mask recognition result

 - - - - -
section
27 [PasteMskRecogData. Solder mask recognition detailed

 - - - - -
(1-30)] result section
28 [Link] Link section







∗ Sections vary with the model as the section specifications above show.

represents applicable models to the corresponding section.

Page 9-24 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

TRecord specifications
[Index] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Format= Data format version STRING 10 characters Use ProductData.
2 Version= Minor version in the FLOAT 001~999
same format
3 Machine= Target model STRING 9 characters Use ProViewer.
4 Date= Date of output STRING 20 characters Example: “1999/07/01,12:12:12”
5 AuthorType= Type of the system that STRING 7 characters Use the facility controller name PT200.
created data
6 Author= Name of the system that STRING 128 characters Use the host computer name.
created data

<Example>
Format=ProductData
Version=001
Machine=ProViewer
Date=“1999/07/01,12:12:12”
AuthorType=PT200
Author=SIRIUS

∗ Indicated data vary with the model. The following sections describe not only record
specifications but also applicability.

[Information] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Value Total Instruction / Remark
[byte] [byte]
1 Stage= Stage number DWORD 10 8 Production stage number
2 Serial= Board serial DWORD 10 19 Normally, specify a number.
3 Code= Board identification STRING 64 69 Board identification code
character string will be entered. (Not
supported currently)

<Example>
Stage=1
Serial=“201”
Code=“”

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Stage= Stage number - - - - - z

2 Serial= Board serial - - - - - z
3 Code= Board identification character string - - - - - z

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-25

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[General.Time] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Total= Total operation hours DWORD The time in the production mode
2 Actual= Actual operation hours DWORD The time found by subtracting the total
downtime from the total operation hours
3 BTact= Per-board production tact DWORD Production tact per board
4 MinTact= Minimum production tact DWORD Minimum production tact

<Example>
Total=1080000
Actual=648000
Btact=150
MinTact=120

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Total= Total operation hours







2 Actual= Actual operation hours






3 Btact= Per-board production tact




-
4 MinTact= Minimum production tact - - - -
 -

[General.Count] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Board= Production board count DWORD The number of produced boards
2 PBoard= Printed board count DWORD The number of boards printed during
automatic operation
3 Module= Produced block count DWORD The quantity of produced blocks
4 Chip= Number of chips to use DWORD The number of chips to use
5 Hsup= Solder dispensing count DWORD The number of times of the solder
dispensation during automatic operation
6 Clean= Cleaning count DWORD The number of times of the mask
cleaning during automatic operation
7 Brec= Board recognition count DWORD The number of times of the board
recognition

<Example>
Board=5000
PBoard=4000
Module=8000
Chip=1200001100
Hsup=30
Clean=30
Brec=3000

Page 9-26 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Board= Production board count







2 PBoard= Printed board count
- - - - -
3 Module= Produced block count -





4 Chip= Number of chips to use - - -
- -
5 Hsup= Solder dispensing count
- - - - -
6 Clean= Cleaning count
- - - - -
7 Brec= Board recognition count -


 - -

[General.Count.BDCN] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 No.1 Remaining shot count of DWORD Remaining shot count of No.1 nozzle
No.1 nozzle
2 No.2 Remaining shot count of DWORD Remaining shot count of No.2 nozzle
No.2 nozzle
3 No.3 Remaining shot count of DWORD Remaining shot count of No.3 nozzle
No.3 nozzle
4 No.4 Remaining shot count of DWORD Remaining shot count of No.4 nozzle
No.4 nozzle

<Example>
No.1,No.2,No.3,No.4
1000,2000,1000,4000

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 No.1 Remaining shot count of No.1 nozzle -
- - - -

2 No.2 Remaining shot count of No.2 nozzle -
- - - -
3 No.3 Remaining shot count of No.3 nozzle -
- - - -
4 No.4 Remaining shot count of No.4 nozzle -
- - - -

[Stop.Time] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Total= Total downtime DWORD Total of downtime

<Example>
Total=10000

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Total= Total downtime







9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-27

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Stop.Time.FRWait] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Fwait= Latency for previous process DWORD Time to wait for the previous process
2 Rwait= Latency for next process DWORD Time to wait for the next process
3 Twait= Latency for previous and DWORD Time to wait for the previous and the
next process next process

<Example>
Fwait=10000
Rwait=108000
Twait=118000

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Fwait= Latency for previous process


-



2 Rwait= Latency for next process


-


3 Twait= Latency for previous and next process - -

- -

[Stop.Time.SCWait] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 SCStop= Immediate/Cycle stop time DWORD Downtime due to a man-induced
immediate/cycle stop

<Example>
SCStop=36000

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 SCStop= Immediate/Cycle stop time







Page 9-28 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Stop.Time.SupplyWait] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Pwait= Latency for components DWORD Downtime due to the depletion of
supply components (Alarm stop)
2 Hcwait= Latency for solder DWORD Downtime due to solder dispensing
dispensing (Counter) (Alarm stop)
3 Hswait= Latency for solder DWORD Downtime due to solder dispensing
dispensing (Sensor) (Alarm stop)
4 CPwait= Latency for cleaning DWORD Downtime due to cleaning paper
paper supply supply (Alarm stop)

<Example>
Pwait=36000
Hcwait=100
Hswait=100
CPwait=0

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Pwait= Latency for components supply -






2 Hcwait= Latency for solder dispensing

- - - - -
(Counter)
3 Hswait= Latency for solder dispensing

- - - - -
(Sensor)
4 CPwait= Latency for cleaning paper

- - - - -
supply

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-29

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Stop.Time.Error] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Trbl= Downtime due to DWORD Downtime due to machine trouble
non-rebootable trouble
2 SCEStop= Immediate/Cycle error DWORD Downtime of automatic
stop time immediate/cycle stop due to errors
(Alarm stop total time) − (4+7+8+9+10)
3 COErr= Chip eject error DWORD Downtime due to chip eject error
downtime (Alarm stop)
4 CMErr= Chip mount error DWORD Downtime due to component mount
downtime error (Alarm stop)
5 CRErr= Chip recognition error DWORD Downtime due to component
downtime recognition error (Alarm stop)
6 CTErr= Chip erect error DWORD Downtime due to height detection
downtime error (Alarm stop)
7 CAErr= Chip pick-up error DWORD Downtime due to component pick-up
downtime error (Alarm stop)
8 CnvStop= Board transport error DWORD Downtime due to board transport
downtime trouble (Alarm stop)
9 BPRcgStop= Board/Mount point DWORD Downtime due to board recognition
recognition error error or mount point recognition error
downtime (Alarm stop)
10 BRcgStop= Board recognition error DWORD Downtime due to board recognition
downtime error (Alarm stop)
11 BEStop= Board extension error DWORD Downtime due to board-extension
downtime check (Alarm stop)
12 PCUStop= Paste count-up DWORD Downtime due to paste count-up
downtime (Alarm stop)
13 MHRcgStop= Mask/Solder recognition DWORD Downtime due to mask or solder
error downtime recognition error (Non-rebootable)
14 FBStop= Feedback error DWORD Downtime due to the area judgment
downtime NG by the solder recognition
(Non-rebootable)
15 BNDRcgStop= Bond recognition error DWORD Downtime due to dispense amount
downtime recognition error (Alarm stop)

<Example>
Trbl=36000
SCEStop=36000
COErr=0
CMErr=0
CRErr=0
CTErr=0
CAErr=36000
CnvStop=36000
BPRcgStop=0
BRcgStop=0
BEStop=0
PCUStop=0
MHRcgStop=0
FBStop=0
BNDRcgStop=0

Page 9-30 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Trbl= Downtime due to non-rebootable







trouble
2 SCEStop= Immediate/Cycle error stop time - -
 - -

3 COErr= Chip eject error downtime - -
 - - -
4 CMErr= Chip mount error downtime - - -

 -
5 CRErr= Chip recognition error downtime - -




6 CTErr= Chip erect error downtime - -

 -

7 CAErr= Chip pick-up error downtime - - -

 -
8 CnvStop= Board transport error downtime






9 BPRcgStop= Board/Mount point recognition
- - -

 -
error downtime
10 BRcgStop= Board recognition error downtime


 - -

11 BEStop= Board extension error downtime
 - - - - -
12 PCUStop= Paste count-up downtime
 - - - - -
13 MHRcgStop= Mask/Solder recognition error

 - - - - -
downtime
14 FBStop= Feedback error downtime
 - - - - -
15 BNDRcgStop= Bond recognition error downtime -
 - - - -

[Stop.Count] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Total= Total down count DWORD Total of down count

<Example>
Total=100

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Total= Total down count







[Stop.Count.FRWait] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Fwait= Count of latency for DWORD Count of wait for the previous process
previous process
2 Rwait= Count of latency for next DWORD Count of wait for the next process
process
3 Trwait= Count of latency for DWORD Count of wait for the previous and the
previous and next process next process

<Example>
Fwait=100
Rwait=108
Twait=208

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-31

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Fwait= Count of latency for previous process - - - - -


2 Rwait= Count of latency for next process - - - - -

3 Trwait= Count of latency for previous and
- - -
 - -
next process

[Stop.Count.SCWait] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 SCStop= Immediate/Cycle stop DWORD Count of a man-induced
count immediate/cycle stop

<Example>
SCStop=360

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 SCStop= Immediate/Cycle stop count







[Stop.Count.SupplyWait] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Pwait= Count of latency for WORD Stop count due to the depletion of
components supply components (Alarm stop)
2 Hcwait= Latency for solder DWORD Downtime due to solder dispensing
dispensing (Counter) (Alarm stop)
3 Hswait= Latency for solder DWORD Downtime due to solder dispensing
dispensing (Sensor) (Alarm stop)
4 CPwait= Count of latency for DWORD Stop count due to cleaning paper
cleaning paper supply supply (Alarm stop)

<Example>
Pwait=36
Hcwait=100
Hswait=100
CPwait=0

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Pwait= Count of latency for components

-





supply
2 Hcwait= Latency for solder dispensing

 - - - - -
(Counter)
3 Hswait= Latency for solder dispensing

 - - - - -
(Sensor)
4 CPwait= Count of latency for cleaning

 - - - - -
paper supply

Page 9-32 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Stop.Count.Error] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Trbl= Stop count due to WORD Stop count due to machine trouble
non-rebootable trouble
2 SCEStop= Immediate/Cycle error WORD Stop count of automatic
stop count immediate/cycle stop due to errors
(Alarm stop total) − (12+15+16+17+18)
3 COErr= Chip eject error stop WORD Stop count due to chip eject error
count (Alarm stop)
4 CMErr= Chip mount error stop WORD Stop count due to component mount
count error (Alarm stop)
5 CRErr= Chip recognition error WORD Stop count due to component
stop count recognition error (Alarm stop)
6 CTErr= Chip erect error stop WORD Stop count due to height detection
count error (Alarm stop)
7 CAErr= Chip pick-up error stop WORD Stop count due to component pick-up
count error (Alarm stop)
8 CnvStop= Board transport error DWORD Stop count due to board transport
stop count trouble (Alarm stop)
9 BPRcgStop= Board/Mount point WORD Stop count due to board recognition
recognition error stop error or mount point recognition error
count (Alarm stop)
10 BRcgStop= Board recognition error DWORD Stop count due to board recognition
stop count error (Alarm stop)
11 BEStop= Board extension error DWORD Stop count due to board-extension
stop count check (Alarm stop)
12 PCUStop= Paste count-up stop time DWORD Stop count due to paste count-up
(Alarm stop)
13 MHRcgStop= Mask/Solder recognition WORD Stop count due to mask or solder
error stop count recognition error (Non-rebootable)
14 FBStop= Feedback error stop WORD Stop count due to the area judgment
count NG by the solder recognition
(Non-rebootable)
15 BNDRcgStop= Bond recognition error WORD Stop count due to dispense amount
stop count recognition error (Alarm stop)

<Example>
Trbl=36
SCEStop=36
COErr=0
CMErr=0
CRErr=0
CTErr=0
CAErr=360
CnvStop=36
BPRcgStop=0
BRcgStop=0
BEStop=0
PCUStop=0
MHRcgStop=0
FBStop=0
BNDRcgStop=0

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-33

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Trbl= Stop count due to non-rebootable







trouble
2 SCEStop= Immediate/Cycle error stop count - -
 - -

3 COErr= Chip eject error stop count - - - - - -
4 CMErr= Chip mount error stop count - - -

 -
5 CRErr= Chip recognition error stop count - -




6 CTErr= Chip erect error stop count - -

 -

7 CAErr= Chip pick-up error stop count - - -

 -
8 CnvStop= Board transport error stop count



 -

9 BPRcgStop= Board/Mount point recognition
- - -

 -
error stop count
10 BRcgStop= Board recognition error stop count


 - -

11 BEStop= Board extension error stop count
 - - - - -
12 PCUStop= Paste count-up stop time
 - - - - -
13 MHRcgStop= Mask/Solder recognition error

 - - - - -
stop count
14 FBStop= Feedback error stop count
 - - - - -
15 BNDRcgStop= Bond recognition error stop count -
 - - - -

[Takeup.UnitNozzle] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Head Head number STRING 5 characters Head number (“A,” “B,” “C” for the
general-purpose machine)
2 Unit Physical unit number WORD Physical unit number
3 Side Position from above or STRING 5 characters “Above” or “1” or “2” or “3”
left of feeder
4 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number STRING 5 characters Only for such models as one or more
nozzle can be set on a single head
5 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number STRING 5 characters Nozzle changer number
6 TCnt Pick-up try count DWORD Pick-up try count

<Example>
Head,Unit,Side,NozzleStocker,NozzleChanger,TCnt
1,101,“1”,1,11,10
2,101,“2”,6,24,10

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Head Head number - - - - - -

2 Unit Physical unit number - - - - - -
3 Side Position from above or left of feeder - - - - - -
4 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number - - - - - -
5 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number - - - - - -
6 TCnt Pick-up try count - - - - - -

Page 9-34 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Takeup.Unit] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Head Head number STRING 5 characters Head number (“A,” “B,” “C” for the
general-purpose machine)
2 Unit Physical unit number WORD 0~99999 Physical unit number
3 TCnt Pick-up try count DWORD Pick-up try count

<Example>
Head,Unit,TCnt
2,101,1100
3,102,200
4,101,2001
2,103,230

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Head Head number - -
 -
 -

2 Unit Physical unit number - -


 -
3 TCnt Pick-up try count - -


 -

[Takeup.Nozzle] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Head Head number STRING 5 characters Head number (“A,” “B,” “C” for the
general-purpose machine)
2 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number STRING 5 characters Only for such models as one or more
nozzle can be set on a single head
3 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number STRING 5 characters Nozzle changer number
4 TCnt Pick-up try count DWORD Pick-up try count

<Example>
Head,NozzleStocker,NozzleChanger,TCnt
2,101,,110
3,102,,200
4,101,,201
5,103,,230

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Head Head number - -
 -
 -

2 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number - -
 - - -
3 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number - - -

 -
4 TCnt Pick-up try count - -


 -

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-35

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Takeup.UnitNozzleStocker] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Head Head number STRING 5 characters Head number (“A,” “B,” “C” for the
general-purpose machine)
2 Unit Physical unit number WORD Physical unit number
3 Side Position from above or STRING 5 characters “Above” or “1” or “2” or “3”
left of feeder
4 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number STRING 5 characters Only for such models as one or more
nozzle can be set on a single head
5 TCnt Pick-up try count DWORD Pick-up try count

<Example>
Head,Unit,Side,NozzleStocker,TCnt
1,101,“1”,1,10
2,101,“2”,2,20

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Head Head number - - - - -


2 Unit Physical unit number - - - - -

3 Side Position from above or left of
- - - - -

feeder
4 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number - - - - -

5 TCnt Pick-up try count - - - - -


[Takeup.UnitNozzleChanger] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Head Head number STRING 5 characters Head number (“A,” “B,” “C” for the
general-purpose machine)
2 Unit Physical unit number WORD Physical unit number
3 Side Position from above or STRING 5 characters “Above” or “1” or “2” or “3”
left of feeder
4 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number STRING 5 characters Only for such models as one or more
nozzle can be set on a single head
5 TCnt Pick-up try count DWORD Pick-up try count

<Example>
Head,Unit,Side,NozzleChanger,TCnt
1,101,“1”,1,10
2,101,“2”,2,20

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Head Head number - - - - -


2 Unit Physical unit number - - - - -

3 Side Position from above or left of
- - - - -

feeder
4 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number - - - - -

5 TCnt Pick-up try count - - - - -


Page 9-36 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Miss.Unit] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Head Head number STRING 5 characters Head number
2 Unit Physical unit number WORD 0~99999 Physical unit number
3 Tmiss Pick-up miss count WORD Pick-up miss count
4 Rmiss Recognition miss count WORD Recognition miss count
5 Hmiss Height miss count WORD Height miss count

<Example>
Head,Unit,Tmiss,Rmiss,Hmiss
1,101,1,0,0
1,102,1,1,0
2,101,2,0,
2,103,0,1,0

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Head Head number - -
 -
 -

2 Unit Physical unit number - -


 -
3 Tmiss Pick-up miss count - -


 -
4 Rmiss Recognition miss count - -


 -
5 Hmiss Height miss count - -

 - -

[Miss.Nozzle] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Head Head number STRING 5 characters Head number (“A,” “B,” “C” for the
general-purpose machine)
2 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number STRING 5 characters Only for such models as one or more
nozzle can be set on a single head
3 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number STRING 5 characters Nozzle changer number
4 Tmiss Pick-up miss count WORD Pick-up miss count
5 Rmiss Recognition miss count WORD Recognition miss count
6 Hmiss Height miss count WORD Height miss count

<Example>
Head,NozzleStocker,NozzleChanger,Tmiss,Rmiss,Hmiss
1,6,,2,0,1
1,2,,3,0,1,
2,1,,2,100
2,5,,3,20,0

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Head Head number - -
 -
 -

2 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number - -
 - - -
3 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number - - -

 -
4 Tmiss Pick-up miss count - -


 -
5 Rmiss Recognition miss count - -


 -
6 Hmiss Height miss count - -

 - -

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-37

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Miss.UnitNozzle] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Head Head number STRING 5 characters Head number (“A,” “B,” “C” for the
general-purpose machine)
2 Unit Physical unit number WORD Physical unit number
3 Side Position from above or STRING 5 characters “Above” or “1” or “2” or “3”
left of feeder
4 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number STRING 5 characters Only for such models as one or more
nozzle can be set on a single head
5 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number STRING 5 characters Nozzle changer number
6 Tmiss Pick-up miss count WORD Pick-up miss count
7 Rmiss Recognition miss count WORD Recognition miss count
8 Hmiss Height miss count WORD Height miss count

<Example>
Head,Unit,Side,NozzleStocker,NozzleChanger,Tmiss,Rmiss,Hmiss
1,101,“1”,6,22,2,0,1
1,102,“2”,2,23,3,0,1
2,101,“Above”,2,24,2,10,0
2,103,“Above”,5,25,3,20,0

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Head Head number - - - - - -

2 Unit Physical unit number - - - - - -
3 Side Position from above or left of
- - - - - -
feeder
4 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number - - - - - -
5 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number - - - - - -
6 Tmiss Pick-up miss count - - - - - -
7 Rmiss Recognition miss count - - - - - -
8 Hmiss Height miss count - - - - - -

Page 9-38 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Miss.UnitNozzleStocker] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Head Head number STRING 5 characters Head number
2 Unit Physical unit number WORD Physical unit number
3 Side Position from above or STRING 5 characters “Above” or “1” or “2” or “3”
left of feeder
4 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number STRING 5 characters Only for such models as one or more
nozzle can be set on a single head
5 Tmiss Pick-up miss count WORD Pick-up miss count
6 Rmiss Recognition miss count WORD Recognition miss count
7 Hmiss Height miss count WORD Height miss count

<Example>
Head,Unit,Side,NozzleStocker,Tmiss,Rmiss,Hmiss
1,101,“1”,6,2,0,1
1,102,“2”,2,3,0,1
2,101,“Above”,1,2,10,0
2,103,“Above”,5,3,20,0

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Head Head number - - - - -


2 Unit Physical unit number - - - - -

3 Side Position from above or left of
- - - - -

feeder
4 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker number - - - - -

5 Tmiss Pick-up miss count - - - - -

6 Rmiss Recognition miss count - - - - -

7 Hmiss Height miss count - - - - -


9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-39

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Miss.UnitNozzleChanger] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Head Head number STRING 5 characters Head number
2 Unit Physical unit number WORD Physical unit number
3 Side Position from above or STRING 5 characters “Above” or “1” or “2” or “3”
left of feeder
4 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number STRING 5 characters Nozzle changer position
5 Tmiss Pick-up miss count WORD Pick-up miss count
6 Rmiss Recognition miss count WORD Recognition miss count
7 Hmiss Height miss count WORD Height miss count

<Example>
Head,Unit,Side,NozzleChanger,Tmiss,Rmiss,Hmiss
1,101,“1”,22,2,0,1
1,102,“2”,23,3,0,1
2,101,“Above”,22,2,10,0
2,103,“Above”,24,3,20,0

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Head Head number - - - - -


2 Unit Physical unit number - - - - -

3 Side Position from above or left of feeder - - - - -

4 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number - - - - -

5 Tmiss Pick-up miss count - - - - -

6 Rmiss Recognition miss count - - - - -

7 Hmiss Height miss count - - - - -


[PasteMskRecog] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Date Recognition-judgment STRING 14 characters Form MM-DD hh:mm:ss
date and time
2 BadPattern Worst pattern WORD Worst pattern

<Example>
Date=“04-15 14:13:12”
BadPattern=5

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Date Recognition-judgment date and time
 - - - - -

2 BadPattern Worst pattern
 - - - - -

Page 9-40 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[PasteMskRecogData.(1-30)] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Judge Judgment result STRING 2 characters “OK” represents normal, “NG”
abnormal, and “FB” feedback.
2 NRate Solder deposition rate FLOAT 0.001~ Unit [%] Significant digits 0.001 {Mask
9.999 aperture area (In teaching) − Mask
aperture area (In production) ÷ Mask
aperture area (In teaching)}
3 TRate Clogging rate FLOAT 0.001~ Unit [%] Significant digits 0.001
(SP22 only) 9.999 Solder area (In production) ÷ Mask
aperture area (In teaching)
4 PatternX Deviation in X direction FLOAT 0.001~ Unit [mm] Significant digits 0.001
9.999
5 PatternY Deviation in Y direction FLOAT 0.001~ Unit [mm] Significant digits 0.001
9.999
6 MaskArea Mask aperture area FLOAT 0.001~ Unit [mm^2] Significant digits 0.001
(In production) 9.999
(SP22 only)
7 PasteArea Solder area FLOAT 0.001~ Unit [mm^2] Significant digits 0.001
9.999

<Example>
Judge=“OK”
NRate=1.000
TRate=1.200
PatternX=- 1.205
PatternY=0.245
MaskArea=12.148
PasteArea=15.212

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Judge Judgment result
 - - - - -

2 NRate Solder deposition rate
 - - - - -
3 TRate Clogging rate (SP22 only)
 - - - - -
4 PatternX Deviation in X direction
 - - - - -
5 PatternY Deviation in Y direction
 - - - - -
6 MaskArea Mask aperture area

 - - - - -
(In production) (SP22 only)
7 PasteArea Solder area
 - - - - -

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-41

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Link] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 MCDFile= Linked machine data WORD 20 characters YYYYMMDDhhmmss.mcd
information file name

<Example>
MCDFile=“20000612130000.mcd”

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 MCDFile= Linked machine data information







file name

6. Production control information initial value file

TSection specifications
The section is added to the production control information file.

No. Section name Stands for

1 [Attribute] Attribute

TRecord specifications
Differences between this file and the production control information file are extracted.
[Index] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Value [byte] Instruction / Remark
1 Format= Data format version STRING 16 Use ProductInitData.

[Attribute] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Value [byte] Instruction / Remark
1 AddFlag= Initial-value flag STRING 1 Choose “+” or “−” as the attribute of
the production control information

<Example>
AddFlag= −

Page 9-42 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

7. Machine data information file

TSection specifications
Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 [Index] Index section







2 [Lot] Lot section






3 [Board] Board data section






4 [BoardRecogData] Board recognition data section






5 [MountRecogData] Mount-point recognition data
- - -



section
6 [SoftSwitch] Software switch data section






7 [PasteMskRecog] Solder recognition data
 - - - - -
8 [PasteMskRecogData. Mask recognition information

 - - - - -
(1~30)] data
9 [Coordinates] Coordinate data section - -




10 [BlockAttribulte] Block attribute section - -




11 [FdrTblMode] Feeder table mode section - -
 -


12 [ChipData] Chip data section - -




13 [PartsData] Parts data section - -




14 [Tray] Tray data section - - -



15 [Palette] Pallet data section - - -



16 [Feeder] Feeder section - -




17 [Stock] Stock section - -




18 [Nozzle] Nozzle section - -





∗ A section with
exists in each machine data information file.

∗ (1-30) in No. 8 [PasteMskRecogData.(1-30)] means that 1 to 30 sections exist.

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-43

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

TRecord specifications
[Index] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Format= Data format version STRING 7 characters Use McnData.
2 Version= Minor version in the FLOAT 001~999
same format
3 Machine= Target model STRING 9 characters Use ProViewer.
4 Date= Date of output STRING 20 characters
5 AuthorType= Type of the system that STRING 7 characters Use the facility controller name PT200.
created data
6 Author= Name of the system that STRING 128 characters Use the host computer name.
created data

<Example>
Format=McnData
Version=001
Machine=ProViewer
Date=“1999/07/10,14:12:23”
AuthorType=PT200
Author=SIRIUS

[Lot] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Group Group name STRING 20 characters LC is not supported.
2 LotName Lot name STRING 20 characters Lot name
3 LotNum Lot number STRING 20 characters Used for batch download.
Normally the number is 0.
4 PTFileName Data name on the facility STRING 20 characters
controller (PT/LC)
5 Version Data version DOUBLE
6 MCFileName Data name on the machine STRING 20 characters
7 Mpoint Total mount points DWORD

<Example>
Group,LotName,LotNum,PTFileName,Version,MCFileName,Mpoint
“WORK”,“Lot1”,1,“PTData1”,0.01,“PCBord.dat”,500

Applicability
All PT200-support models

Page 9-44 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Board] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 BoardX Board size (L, in mm) FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
2 BoardY Board size (W, in mm) FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
3 BoardZ Board size (H, in mm) FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
4 OffsetX Board origin offset X FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
5 OffsetY Board origin offset Y FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
6 OrgType Coordinate system STRING 11 characters “Right,Rear” “Right,Front”
(Character constant) “Left,Front” “Left,Rear”
7 OrgSufaceType Board upper/lower surface STRING “Top” or “Bottom”
reference selection
8 MasterBadMarkX Master bad mark FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
X-coordinate of board model.
9 MasterBadMarkY Master bad mark FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
Y-coordinate of board model.
10 BoardRecogMode Board recognition mode STRING 14 characters “BoardRecogA”
“BoardRecogAB”
“BoardRecogABC”
“BoardRecogABCD”
“BlockRecogA”
“BlockRecogAB”
“BlockRecogABC”
“BlockRecogABCD”

<Example>
BoardX=330.000 MasterBadMarkX=0.01
BoardY=250.000 MasterBadMarkY=0.01
BoardZ=1.600 BoardRecogMode=BoardRecogDataA
OffsetX=0.000
OffsetY=0.000
OrgType=Right,Rear

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 BoardX Board size (L, in mm)







2 BoardY Board size (W, in mm)






3 BoardZ Board size (H, in mm)






4 OffsetX Board origin offset X






5 OffsetY Board origin offset Y






6 OrgType Coordinate system



 -


(Character constant)
7 OrgSufaceType Board upper/lower surface
- - -
 - -
reference selection
8 MasterBadMarkX Master bad mark X-coordinate of
- -




board
9 MasterBadMarkY Master bad mark Y-coordinate of
- -




board
10 BoardRecogMode Board recognition mode







9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-45

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[BoardRecogData] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 BlockNo Block number WORD Depends on 0 for board check
model.
2 Type Recognition type STRING 1 character “A”,“B”,“C”,“D”
3 X Recognition X-coordinate FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
4 Y Recognition Y-coordinate FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.

<Example>
BlockNum,Type,X,Y
0,“A”,1.00,0.02

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 BlockNo Block number







2 Type Recognition type






3 X Recognition X-coordinate






4 Y Recognition Y-coordinate







[MountRecog.Data] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 PositionX Chip coordinate data FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
X-coordinate model.
2 PositionY Chip coordinate data FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
Y-coordinate model.
3 PositionA Chip coordinate data FLOAT Depends on Unit = [deg], Significant digits = 0.01
A-angle model.
4 ChipName Chip name STRING 20 characters
5 PartsName Mount component name STRING 21 characters
6 Pcomment Silk symbol STRING 8 characters
7 PSkip Parts skip designation STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”
8 MSkip Mount point skip designation STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”
9 BSkip Block point skip designation STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”
10 BlockNum Block number WORD Depends on
model.
11 MountRecogData Mount-point recognition FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
X coordinate X model.
12 MountRecogData Mount-point recognition FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
Y coordinate Y model.

<Example>
PositionX,PositionY,PositionA,ChipName,PartsName,Pcomment,PSkip,MSkip,BSkip,BlockNum,
MountRecogDataX,MountRecogDataY
100.00,20.00,90,“ChipA”,“PartB”,“BGA”,“YES”,“NO”,“NO”,1,25.00,40.00

Page 9-46 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 PositionX Chip coordinate data X-coordinate -
-
-
  

2 PositionY Chip coordinate data Y-coordinate -
-
-
  
3 PositionA Chip coordinate data A-angle -
-
-
  
4 ChipName Chip name -
-
-
  
5 PartsName Mount component name -
-
-
  
6 Pcomment Silk symbol -
-
-
  
7 PSkip Parts skip designation -
-
-
  
8 MSkip Mount point skip designation -
-
-
  
9 BSkip Block point skip designation -
-
-
  
10 BlockNum Block number -
-
-
  
11 MountRecogDataX Mount-point recognition coordinate X -
-
-
  
12 MountRecogDataY Mount-point recognition coordinate Y -
-
-
  

[SoftSwitch] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 MasterBadMark Detecting the bad mark STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”
on board
2 BadMark Bad mark STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”
3 BoardRecog Board recognition STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”
4 MountRecog Mount-point recognition STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”

<Example>
MasterBadMark=“YES”
BadMark=“YES”
BoardRecog=“YES”
MountRecog=“YES”

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 MasterBadMark Detecting the bad mark on board -
    

2 BadMark Bad mark -
    
3 BoardRecog Board recognition      
4 MountRecog Mount-point recognition -
-
-
  

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-47

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[PasteRecog] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Mode Solder recognition timing STRING 8 characters “Print” or “Cleaning”
2 Interval Solder recognition counter WORD 0~255 Solder recognition counter

<Example>
Mode=“Print”
Interval=1

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Mode Solder recognition timing  -
-
-
-
-

2 Interval Solder recognition counter  -
-
-
-
-

[PasteMskRecog (1~30)] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Chk Check flag STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”
2 PasteX Coordinate data X FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.001
(In mm) model.
3 PasteY Coordinate data Y FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.001
(In mm) model.
4 Rpara Shape characteristic FLOAT -9999999.0~ Significant digits = 0.001
9999999.0
value
5 Rnum Circumference length FLOAT -9999999.0~ Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.001
9999999.0
6 Rarea Area FLOAT -9999999.0~ Unit = [mm^2], Significant digits = 0.001
9999999.0

<Example>
Chk=“YES”
PasteX=330.000
PasteY=250.000
Rpara=0.000
Rnum=0.000
Rarea=0.000

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Chk Check flag  -
-
-
-
-

2 PasteX Coordinate data X (In mm)  -
-
-
-
-

3 PasteY Coordinate data Y (In mm)  -
-
-
-
-

4 Rpara Shape characteristic value  -
-
-
-
-

5 Rnum Circumference length  -
-
-
-
-

6 Rarea Area  -
-
-
-
-

Page 9-48 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Coordinates] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 PositionX Chip coordinate data FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
X-coordinate model.
2 PositionY Chip coordinate data FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
Y-coordinate model.
3 PositionA Chip coordinate data FLOAT Depends on Unit = [deg], Significant digits = 0.01
A-angle model.
4 ChipName Chip name STRING 20 characters
5 PartsName Mount component name STRING 21 characters
6 Pcomment Silk symbol STRING 8 characters
7 PSkip Parts skip designation STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”
8 MSkip Mount point skip designation STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”
9 BSkip Block point skip designation STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”
10 BlockNum Block number WORD Depends on
model.

<Example>
PositionX,PositionY,PositionA,ChipName,PartsName,Pcomment,PSkip,MSkip,BSkip,BlockNum
100.00,20.00,90,“ChipA”,“PartB”,“BGA”,“YES”,“NO”,“NO”,11

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 PositionX Chip coordinate data X-coordinate -
-
   

2 PositionY Chip coordinate data Y-coordinate -
-
   
3 PositionA Chip coordinate data A-angle -
-
   
4 ChipName Chip name -
-
   
5 PartsName Mount component name -
-
   
6 Pcomment Silk symbol -
-
   
7 PSkip Parts skip designation -
-
   
8 MSkip Mount point skip designation -
-
   
9 BSkip Block point skip designation -
-
   
10 BlockNum Block number -
-
   

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-49

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[BlockAttribute] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 OX Block origin X-coordinate FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
2 OY Block origin Y-coordinate FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
3 OZ Block origin Z-coordinate FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
4 BX Bad mark X-coordinate FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
5 BY Bad mark Y-coordinate FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
6 ROT Rotation instruction STRING 3 characters Unit=[deg],Effective,digit=0.01
7 B Bad block designation STRING 9 characters “Excellent” or “Defect”
8 BlockNum Block number WORD Depends on Block number
model.

<Example>
OX,OY,OZ,BX,BY,ROT,B,BlockNum
100,100,0,100,100,“270°”,“Excellent”,1

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 OX Block origin X-coordinate -
-
   

2 OY Block origin Y-coordinate -
-
   
3 OZ Block origin Z-coordinate -
-
   
4 BX Bad mark X-coordinate -
-
   
5 BY Bad mark Y-coordinate -
-
   
6 ROT Rotation instruction -
-
   
7 B Bad block designation -
-
   
8 BlockNum Block number -
-
   

[FdrTblMode] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 NowStation Currently selected STRING 5 characters “Both” or “Right” or “Left”
feeder table
2 FdrTblMode Operation mode of STRING 7 characters “Change” or “Reserve” or “Join”
feeder table
3 Pass Pass head STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”

<Example>
NowStation,FdrTblMode,Pass
“Both”,“Join”,“YES”

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 NowStation Currently selected feeder table -
-
 -
-


2 FdrTblMode Operation mode of feeder table -
-
 -
-

3 Pass Pass head -
-
 -
-


Page 9-50 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[ChipData] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Chip Chip name STRING 20 characters Chip name
2 ChipKindName Chip type name STRING 20 characters Chip type name
3 ChipL Chip size L (X) FLOAT 0.01~ Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
999.00
4 ChipW Chip size W (X) FLOAT 0.01~ Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
999.00
5 ChipT Chip size T (X) FLOAT 0.01~ Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
999.00
6 NozzleA Available nozzle STRING 10 characters Available nozzle A
7 NozzleB Available nozzle STRING 10 characters Available nozzle B
8 NozzleC Available nozzle STRING 10 characters Available nozzle C
9 NozzleD Available nozzle STRING 10 characters Available nozzle D
10 NozzleE Available nozzle STRING 10 characters Available nozzle E

<Example>
Chip,ChipKindName,ChipL,ChipW,ChipT,NozzleA,NozzleB,NozzleC,NozzleD,NozzleE
“BGA10P”,“BGA”,3.21,2.03,1.00,130,0,0,0,0,0

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Chip Chip name -
-
   

2 ChipKindName Chip type name -
-
   
3 ChipL Chip size L (X) -
-
   
4 ChipW Chip size W (X) -
-
   
5 ChipT Chip size T (X) -
-
   
6 NozzleA Available nozzle -
-
-
  
7 NozzleB Available nozzle -
-
-
  
8 NozzleC Available nozzle -
-
-
  
9 NozzleD Available nozzle -
-
-
  
10 NozzleE Available nozzle -
-
-
  

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-51

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[PartData] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 PartsName Mount component name STRING 21 characters
2 Chip Chip name STRING 20 characters
3 PartsPack Style-of-packing angle WORD −270~270 −270, −180, −90, 0, 90, 180, 270
4 PartsAngle Pick-up angle WORD −270~270 −270, −180, −90, 0, 90, 180, 270
5 Pcount Mount points DWORD Mount points
6 PSkip Skip designation STRING 3 characters “YES” or “NO”
7 TakeUpRetry Pick-up retry count WORD
8 RecogRetry Recognition retry count WORD
9 TakeRecogRetry Pick-up recognition retry WORD
count

<Example>
PartsName,Chip,PartsPack,PartsAngle,Pcount,PSkip,TakeUpRetry,RecogRetry,TakeRecogRetry
“Fixed resistor 1005_t0.35”,“aaa”,−90.0,180,10,“YES”,3,3,

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 PartsName Mount component name -
-
   

2 Chip Chip name -
-
   
3 PartsPack Style-of-packing angle -
-
   
4 PartsAngle Pick-up angle -
-
-   
5 Pcount Mount points -
-
   
6 PSkip Skip designation -
-
   
7 TakeUpRetry Pick-up retry count -
-
   
8 RecogRetry Recognition retry count -
-
  - 
9 TakeRecogRetry Pick-up recognition retry count -
-
-
-  -

[Tray] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 TrayName Tray name STRING 20 characters
2 TrayPitch Tray shelf pitch Z FLOAT Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
3 ChipCountX Chip X count WORD
4 ChipCountY Chip Y count WORD
5 TrayZ Tray shelf count Z WORD

<Example>
TrayName,TrayPitch,ChipCountX,ChipCountY,TrayZ
“QFP140P”,20.5,20.5,10,5,3

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 TrayName Tray name -
-
-
  

2 TrayPitch Tray shelf pitch Z -
-
-
  
3 ChipCountX Chip X count -
-
-
  
4 ChipCountY Chip Y count -
-
-
  
5 TrayZ Tray shelf count Z -
-
-
  

Page 9-52 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Pallete] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 FeederType Feeder type STRING 5 characters
2 TrayPositionX Tray position X-coordinate FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
3 TrayPositionY Tray position Y-coordinate FLOAT Depends on Unit = [mm], Significant digits = 0.01
model.
4 Rot Rotation WORD 0~270 Unit = [deg] 0,90,180,270
5 TrayName Tray name STRING 20 characters

<Example>
FeederType,TrayPositionX,TrayPositionY,Rot,TrayName
1001,10.1,0.0,90,“Tray00001”

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 FeederType Feeder type -
-
-
  -

2 TrayPositionX Tray position X-coordinate -
-
-
  -

3 TrayPositionY Tray position Y-coordinate -
-
-
  -

4 Rot Rotation -
-
-
  -

5 TrayName Tray name -
-
-
  -

[Feeder] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 FeederType Feeder type STRING 5 characters
2 Fname Feeder name STRING 25 characters
3 FOName Feeder characteristic name STRING 25 characters Planning to support the intelligent feeder

<Example>
FeederType,Fname,FOName
10,“CM100.12mm.L.1F”,

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 FeederType Feeder type -
-
   

2 Fname Feeder name -
-
   
3 FOName Feeder characteristic name -
-
   

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00 Page 9-53

9.3 ASCII Format Specifications

[Stock] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Unit Physical unit number WORD
2 Side Position from above or STRING 5 characters “Above” or “1” or “2” or “3”
left of feeder
3 Chip Chip name STRING 20 characters
4 ChipKindName Chip type name STRING 20 characters
5 PartsName Mount component name STRING 20 characters
6 FeederType Feeder type STRING 5 characters
7 Deep Depth code STRING 25 characters “Paper” or “Embossing”

<Example>
Unit,Side,Chip,ChipKindName,PartsName,FeederType,Deep
1001,“1”,“BGA15B”,“BGA”,“PV- 153122”,10,“Paper”

Applicability
Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Unit Physical unit number -
-
   

2 Side Position from above or left of feeder -
-
   
3 Chip Chip name -
-
   
4 ChipKindName Chip type name -
-
   
5 PartsName Mount component name -
-
   
6 FeederType Feeder type -
-
   
7 Deep Depth code -
-
  - 

[Nozzle] section

No. Key name Stands for Type Range Instruction / Remark

1 Head Head position STRING 5 characters
2 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker position STRING 5 characters
3 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number STRING 5 characters
4 NozzleNum Nozzle number STRING 10 characters
5 TURN Turn number WORD Number of turns before nozzle changing

<Example>
Head,NozzleStocker,NozzleChanger,NozzleNum,TURN
1,6,21,“1005”,20

Applicability

Multi
No. Section name Stands for Printer Dispenser Rotary
CM95R CM100
Modular

1 Head Head position -
-
   

2 NozzleStocker Nozzle stocker position -
-
 -
-

3 NozzleChanger Nozzle changer number -
-
-
  
4 NozzleNum Nozzle number -
-
   
5 TURN Turn number -
-
-
-
-


Page 9-54 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A02-00

 9.4 Event List
9.

9.4 Event List

9.4.1 PT Event List
Describes the lists of PT and machine events.

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
1 01 000000 Started PTShellService PTShell service is started.
2 01 000001 Finished PTShellService PTShell service finished.
Failed to connect with KICService at starting
3 01 000002 Failed to start PTShellService
PTShellService.
Hard Disk is getting full soon.
4 01 000003 Hard Disk capacity decrease
Please delete file.
ProViewer Data Disk is getting full soon.
5 01 000200 ProViewer DataDisk capacity decrease
Please delete file.
6 02 000000 Started KICService KICService is started.
7 02 000001 Finished KICService KICService finished.
8 03 000000 Started FASOCKService FASOCKService is started.
9 03 000001 Finished FASOCKService FASOCKService finished.
Failed to connect with KICService at starting
10 03 000002 Failed to start FASOCKService
FASOCKService.
11 03 000003 FASOCKServer correct return FASOCKServer return from error.
12 03 00000F Finished upload production data Finished upload production data.
13 03 000010 Packet data length (LNG) is incorrect FASOCK Packet length (LNG) is incorrect.
14 03 000011 Packet Block MAX (BMX) is incorrect FASOCK Block MAX (BMX) is incorrect.
15 03 000012 Packet Block No (BNO) is incorrect FASOCK Block No (BNO) is incorrect.
Packet send side Host/Line/Machine/HostName is
16 03 000013
incorrect
FASOCK send side is incorrect.
Packet receive side Host/Line/Machine/HostName
17 03 000014
is incorrect
FASOCK receive side is incorrect.

18 03 000015 Packet main command (CMD1) is incorrect FASOCK main command (CMD1) is incorrect.
19 03 000016 Packet sub command (CMD2) is incorrect FASOCK sub command (CMD2) is incorrect.
20 03 000017 Packet code (COD) is incorrect FASOCK code (COD) is incorrect.
21 03 000018 Packet data is incorrect FASOCK data is incorrect.
22 03 000019 Packet protocol version is incorrect FASOCK version is incorrect.
23 03 000030 FASOCK communication error Communication is time-out with MC.
24 03 000031 FASOCK communication error Communication is time-out with KICS.
25 03 000032 FASOCK communication error Can't connect with MC.
26 03 000033 Data file is incorrect Can't open data file.
27 03 000034 Data file is incorrect Can't write in data file.
28 03 000035 Data file is incorrect Can't read data file.
29 03 000036 Data file is incorrect Can't delete data file.
30 03 000037 Failed to create socket Can't create socket.
31 03 000050 Started to download MCData from PT
32 03 000051 Finished download MCData from PT
33 03 000052 Started to upload MCData from PT
34 03 000053 Finished upload MCData from PT
35 03 000054 Started to request list from PT
36 03 000055 Finished request list from PT
37 03 000056 Started to download data from MC
38 03 000057 Finished download data from MC
39 03 000058 Started to upload MCData from MC
40 03 000059 Finished upload MCData from MC

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-55

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
41 03 00005A Started to request list from MC
42 03 00005B Finished request list from MC
43 03 00005C Can't communicate There is no reply because of cut line or power off,etc.
44 03 000200 Started to download MCData from PT
45 03 000201 Started to upload MCData from PT
46 03 000202 Started to download MCData from Machine
47 03 000203 Started to upload MCData from Machine
48 03 000204 Started to download PRUData from PT
49 03 000205 Started to upload PRUData from PT
50 03 000206 Started to download PRUData from Machine
51 03 000207 Started to upload PRUData from Machine
52 03 000208 Finished to download MCData from PT
53 03 000209 Finished to upload MCData from PT
54 03 00020A Finished to download MCData from Machine
55 03 00020B Finished to upload MCData from Machine
56 03 00020C Finished to download PRUData from PT
57 03 00020D Finished to upload PRUData from PT
58 03 00020E Finished to download PRUData from Machine
59 03 00020F Finished to upload PRUData from Machine
60 04 000000 Started FileServer service FileServerService is started.
61 04 000001 Finished FileServer service FileServerService finished.
Failed to connect with KICS at starting
62 04 000002 Failed to start FileServer service
FileServerService.
There is update data from MC.
63 04 000003 Upload data
[@H.L.M][@Filename]
There is request data from MC.
64 04 000004 Request data
[@H.L.M][@Filename]
65 04 000005 Download data Data is downloaded. [@H.L.M][@Filename]
66 04 000006 Failed to send data Can't send data. [@Filename]
67 04 000007 Failed to update ChipLibrary Can't open ChipLibrary or there is no OdorikoData.
68 04 000008 ChipLibrary data error Data error occurs at updating Chiplibrary.
69 04 000009 ChipLibrary there is no data There is no data file to update ChipLibrary.
70 04 00000A ChipLibrary there is ChangeTable There is no data file to update ChipLibrary.
71 04 00000B Failed to create PRU data Open error occurs at creating PRU.
72 04 00000C Failed to create PRU data Write error occurs at creating PRU.
Open error occurs at updating OdorikoData.
73 04 00000D Failed to update OdorikoData
[@Filename]
Write error occurs at updating OdorikoData.
74 04 00000E Failed to update OdorikoData
[@Filename]
75 04 00000F There is no file name There is no filename with request from application.
76 04 000010 Finished delete file File is deleted. [@H.L.M][@Filename]
77 04 000011 Finished delete file Lot file is deleted. [@Filename]
78 04 000012 Failed to delete file Tried to delete exclusive file. [@H.L.M][@Filename]
79 04 000013 Failed to delete file Tried to delete exclusive lot file. [@Filename]
Tried to delete non entry file in PTFileList.
80 04 000014 Failed to delete file
[@H.L.M][@Filename]

Page 9-56 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
Tried to delete non entry lot file in PTFileList.
81 04 000015 Failed to delete file
[@Filename]
There is no coincidence in LineConfiguration.
82 04 000016 Failed to enter new data
[@Filename]
There is already same data in PTFileList.
83 04 000017 Failed to enter new data
[@Filename][@H.L.M]
84 04 000018 Failed to enter new data Can't create data file. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
85 04 000019 Finished enter new data New data is entered. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
86 04 00001A Failed to enter data Can't open data file. [@Filename]
87 04 00001B Failed to enter data File seek error occurs. [@Filename]
There is no coincidence in LineConfiguration.
88 04 00001C Failed to enter data
[@Filename]
89 04 00001D Failed to enter data Failed to copy file. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
90 04 00001E Failed to enter data Can't create data file. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
91 04 00001F Finished enter data Data is entered. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
92 04 000020 Finished cancel data lock Lock data is canceled. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
93 04 000021 Failed to request data There is no file. [@Filename]
There is no coincidence in LineConfiguration.
94 04 000022 Failed to request data
[@Filename]
95 04 000023 Failed to request data Failed to copy file in TMP. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
96 04 000024 Failed to request data Select file is exclusive. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
97 04 000025 Finished request data List data is offered. [@H.L.M]
98 04 000026 Finished request data Data file is offered. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
99 04 000027 Failed to copy file Filename is incorrect. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
100 04 000028 Finished copy file File is copied. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
There is no coincidence in LineConfiguration.
101 04 000029 Failed to enter MC list
[@Filename]
There is no file data in PTFileList.
102 04 00002A Failed to enter MC list
[@Filename][@H.L.M]
103 04 00002B Failed to enter MC list Failed to update PTFileList. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
104 04 00002C Finished enter MC list MCList is entered. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
There is no coincidence in LineConfiguration.
105 04 00002D Failed to delete MC list
[@Filename]
There is no file data in PTFileList.
106 04 00002E Failed to delete MC list
[@Filename][@H.L.M]
107 04 00002F Failed to delete MC list Failed to update PTFileList. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
108 04 000030 Finished delete MC list MCList is deleted. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
There is no coincidence in LineConfiguration.
109 04 000031 Failed to download file
[@Filename]
Can't change ASCII→Binary with data file.
110 04 000032 Failed to download file
[@Filename][@H.L.M]

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-57

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
111 04 000033 Failed to download file Failed to forward. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Attribution of data file is incorrect.
112 04 000034 Failed to download file
[@Filename][@H.L.M]
Data is not entered in PTFileList.
113 04 000035 Finished download file
[@Filename][@H.L.M]
114 04 000036 Finished download file File is downloaded. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
There is no coincidence in LineConfiguration.
115 04 000037 Failed to upload file
[@Filename]
116 04 000038 Failed to upload file Failed to forward. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Attribution of data file is incorrect.
117 04 000039 Failed to upload file
[@Filename][@H.L.M]
118 04 00003A Finished upload file File is uploaded. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
119 04 00003B Failed to request list There is no coincidence in LineConfiguration.
Failed to create event to permit access of client.
120 04 00003C Failed to request list
[@H.L.M]
There is no reply from FASOCK within waiting time.
121 04 00003D Failed to request list
[@H.L.M]
122 04 00003E Failed to request list Failed to connect with KICS. [@H.L.M]
123 04 00003F Failed to request list Result for request to KICS is incorrect. [@H.L.M]
124 04 000040 Succeed to request list Result for request to KICS is correct. [@H.L.M]
125 04 000041 Finished request list Finished request List. [@H.L.M]
TEMP File could not be made.
126 04 000042 Failed to create TEMP File.
Check TEMP Directory.
127 04 000043 Downloaded Nozzle Library. Nozzle Library was downloaded. [@H.L.M]
128 04 000044 Failed to download Nozzle Library. Nozzle Library could not be downloaded. [@H.L.M]
129 04 000045 It downloaded FeederLibrary. It downloaded FeederLibrary. [@H.L.M]
130 04 000046 Failed to download of the FeederLib. Failed to download of the FeederLib. [@H.L.M]
131 04 000050 Failed to connect SERVICES Can't connect to SERVICES.
Can't access 'TMP' registry.
132 04 000051 Failed to access 'TMP' registry.
Check setting of registry.
Can't access 'SYSTEM' registry.
133 04 000052 Failed to access 'SYSTEM' registry.
Check setting of registry.
Can't access 'LINE-Setting' registry.
134 04 000053 Failed to access 'LINE-Setting' registry.
Check setting of registry.
135 04 000054 Failed to get memory. Can't get memory.
136 04 000055 Failed to 'PT File' Mapping. Failed to file-mapping of 'PT File'.
Failed to access 'Machine' directory.
137 04 000056 Failed to access 'Machine' directory.
SYSTEM made default 'Machine' directory.
Failed to access 'Data' directory.
138 04 000057 Failed to access 'Data' directory.
PT-SYSTEM made default 'Data' directory.
139 04 000101 Succeeded to download file from High Layer Host. File Stored. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
140 04 000102 Failed to download file from High Layer Host. Error occurred at getting data. [@Filename][@H.L.M]

Page 9-58 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
Succeeded to upload file to High Layer Host.
141 04 000103 Succeeded to upload file to High Layer Host.
[@Filename][@H.L.M]
142 04 000104 Failed to upload file to High Layer Host. Error occurred at getting data. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Succeeded to delete file by requesting from High Deleted file by requesting from High Layer Host.
143 04 000105
Layer Host. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Failed to delete file by requesting from High Layer Failed to delete file by requesting from High Layer
144 04 000106
Host. Host. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Succeeded to delete lot by requesting from High Deleted lot by requesting from High Layer Host.
145 04 000107
Layer Host. [@Filename]
Failed to delete lot by requesting from High Layer Failed to delete lot by requesting from High Layer
146 04 000108
Host. Host. [@Filename]
Succeeded to delete revision by requesting from Deleted revision by requesting from High Layer Host.
147 04 000109
High Layer Host. [@Filename]
Failed to delete revision by requesting from High Failed to delete revision by requesting from High
148 04 000110
Layer Host. Layer Host. [@Filename]
Succeeded to delete group by requesting from High Deleted group by requesting from High Layer Host.
149 04 000111
Layer Host. [@Filename]
Failed to delete group by requesting from High Failed to delete group by requesting from High Layer
150 04 000112
Layer Host. Host. [@Filename]
Succeeded to download by command from High Downloaded to MC by command from High Layer
151 04 000113
Layer Host. Host. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Failed to download by command from High Layer Failed to download by command from High Layer
152 04 000114
Host. Host. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Succeeded to upload by command from High Layer Uploaded from MC by command from High Layer
153 04 000115
Host. Host. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Failed to upload by command from High Layer Failed to upload from MC by command from High
154 04 000116
Host. Layer Host. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Succeeded to request info. of line configuration by Send info. of line configuration by command from
155 04 000117
command from High Layer Host. High Layer Host.
Failed to request info. of line configuration by Failed to request info. of line configuration by
156 04 000118
command from High Layer Host. command from High Layer Host.
Succeeded to request list of group by command Send list of group by command from High Layer
157 04 000119
from High Layer Host. Host.
Failed to request list of group by command from Failed to request list of group by command from High
158 04 000120
High Layer Host. Layer Host.
Succeeded to request list of lot by command from Send list of lot by command from High Layer Host.
159 04 000121
High Layer Host. [@Filename]
Failed to request list of lot by command from High Failed to request list of lot by command from High
160 04 000122
Layer Host. Layer Host. [@Filename]
Made revision by request from High Layer Host.
161 04 000123 Made revision by request from High Layer Host.
[@Filename]
Failed to create revision by request from High Failed to create revision by request from High Layer
162 04 000124
Layer Host. Host. [@Filename]
Succeeded to request list of revision by request Send list of revision by request from High Layer Host.
163 04 000125
from High Layer Host. [@Filename]
Failed to request list of revision by request from Failed to request list of revision by request from High
164 04 000126
High Layer Host. Layer Host. [@Filename]
Succeeded to request list of MC data in lot by Send list of MC data in lot by request from High
165 04 000127
request from High Layer Host. Layer Host. [@Filename]
Failed to request list of MC data in lot by request Failed to request list of MC data in lot by request
166 04 000128
from High Layer Host. from High Layer Host. [@Filename]
Succeeded to request list of MC data in revision by Send list of MC data in revision by request from High
167 04 000129
request from High Layer Host. Layer Host. [@Filename]
Failed to request list of MC data in revision by Failed to request list of MC data in revision by
168 04 000130
request from High Layer Host. request from High Layer Host. [@Filename]
Succeeded to answer info. of MC data by request Send info. of MC data by request from High Layer
169 04 000131
from High Layer Host. Host. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Failed to answer info. of MC data by request from Failed to answer info. of MC data by request from
170 04 000132
High Layer Host. High Layer Host. [@Filename][@H.L.M]

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-59

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
Succeeded to register master by request from High Registered master PT file by request from High
171 04 000133
Layer Host. Layer Host. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Failed to register master by request from High Failed to register master PT file by request from High
172 04 000134
Layer Host. Layer Host. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Copied MC data to other Host.
173 04 000135 Succeeded to copy MC data to other Host.
[@Filename][@H.L.M]
Failed to copy MC data to other Host.
174 04 000136 Failed to copy MC data to other Host.
[@Filename][@H.L.M]
Succeeded to download PRU file from High Layer Downloaded PRU file from High Layer Host.
175 04 000137
Host. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
176 04 000138 Failed to download PRU file from High Layer Host. Error occurred at getting data. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
Uploaded PRU file to High Layer Host.
177 04 000139 Succeeded to upload PRU file to High Layer Host.
[@Filename][@H.L.M]
178 04 000140 Failed to upload PRU file to High Layer Host. Error occurred at getting data. [@Filename][@H.L.M]
179 05 000000 Started EventLogService Started EventLogService
180 05 000001 Finished EventLogService Finished EventLogService
Failed to connect with KICS at starting
181 05 000002 Failed to start EventLogService
EventLogService.
Finished EventLogService because of lack of
182 05 000003 Finished EventLogService incorrect
memory.
183 05 000004 EventLogService is incorrect LogFile is broken.
184 05 000005 EventLogService set Setting of EventLog is changed.
185 05 000006 EventLogService start expire Started expire.
186 05 000007 EventLogService Proxy failure Can't communicate at proxy.
187 05 000008 EventLogService LineMonitor failure Can't communicate at LineMonitor.
188 05 000009 EventLogService failed to expire Can't expire.
189 05 000100 EventLogService finish create Production data Production data is made.
Production data without bar-code information is
190 05 000101 EventLogService finish create NG Production data
made.
191 05 000102 EventLogService failed to create Production data There is no production data or Can't create it.
192 05 000103 EventLogService failed to get Production data Can't recognize temporary filename.
193 05 000104 EventLogService failed to get bar-code information Can't get bar-code information.
Can't recognize temporary filename or bar-code
194 05 000105 EventLogService failed to get information
information.
EventLoggerService failed to get registry
195 05 000106
information
Failed to get registry information.

196 06 000000 Started OpticalCommunicateService Started OpticalCommunicateService

197 06 000001 Finished OpticalCommunicateService Finished OpticalCommunicateService
Failed to connect with KICS at starting
198 06 000002 Failed to start OpticalCommunicateService
OpticalCommunicateService.
199 06 000003 Communicate error occurs Receive time-out occurred with KICServer.
200 06 000004 Communicate error occurs Communicate time-out occurred with MC.
201 06 000005 Communicate error occurs There is no reply. Failed to retry to communicate.
202 06 000006 OpticalCommunicateService Lack of memory Can't execute because of lack of memory.
203 06 000007 OpticalBoard error Can't read data.
204 06 000008 OpticalBoard error Can't write data.
205 06 00000F Finished upload production data Finished upload production data.
206 06 000010 OpticalBoard error Parity error occurs.
207 06 000011 OpticalBoard error EMG error occurs.
208 06 000012 OpticalBoard error Sequence error occurs.
209 06 000013 OpticalBoard error Memory access error occurs.
210 06 000014 OpticalDriver error Over flow of event packet occurs.

Page 9-60 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
211 06 000050 Started to download MCData from PT
212 06 000051 Finished download MCData from PT
213 06 000052 Started to upload MCData from PT
214 06 000053 Finished upload MCData from PT
215 06 000054 Started to request list from PT
216 06 000055 Finished request list from PT
217 06 000056 Started to download data from MC
218 06 000057 Finished download data from MC
219 06 000058 Started to upload MCData from MC
220 06 000059 Finished upload MCData from MC
221 06 00005A Started to request list from MC
222 06 00005B Finished request list from MC
223 06 00005C Can't communicate There is no reply because of cut line or power off,etc.
224 06 000200 Started to download MCData from PT
225 06 000201 Started to upload MCData from PT
226 06 000202 Started to download MCData from Machine
227 06 000203 Started to upload MCData from Machine
228 06 000204 Started to download PRUData from PT
229 06 000205 Started to upload PRUData from PT
230 06 000206 Started to download PRUData from Machine
231 06 000207 Started to upload PRUData from Machine
232 06 000208 Finished to download MCData from PT
233 06 000209 Finished to upload MCData from PT
234 06 00020A Finished to download MCData from Machine
235 06 00020B Finished to upload MCData from Machine
236 06 00020C Finished to download PRUData from PT
237 06 00020D Finished to upload PRUData from PT
238 06 00020E Finished to download PRUData from Machine
239 06 00020F Finished to upload PRUData from Machine
240 07 000000 Started SerialCommunicateService Started SerialCommunicateService
241 07 000001 Finished SerialCommunicateService Finished SerialCommunicateService.
Failed to connect with KICS at starting
242 07 000002 Failed to start SerialCommunicateService
SerialCommunicateService.
243 08 000000 Data server service start. A data server service was started.
244 08 000001 Data server service completion. A data server service was finished.
Failed to connect with KICS when a data server
245 08 000002 Data server service start failure.
service started.
246 08 000003 Failed to get memory. Can't get memory.
247 08 000004 A client was connected. A client was connected with the data server service.
248 08 000005 A client was cut. A client cut it from the data server service.
A client during the connection unusually cut it for the
249 08 000006 A client was unusually cut.
data server service.
250 09 000000 Started PTPrintService PT Print Service was started.

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-61

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
251 09 000001 Finished PTPrintService PT Print Service was finished.
252 09 000002 Print start. Print output was started.
253 09 000003 Print completion. Print output was finished.
254 09 000004 Print failure. It failed in the print output.
255 09 000101 There is no printer registration. A printer isn't connected with PT.
256 09 000102 Memory allocation error. Memory allocation error.
257 09 000103 A file to print isn't found. A file to print isn't found.
As for the form of the printing file, it doesn't cope with
258 09 000104 The file form which hasn't coped with it.
it.
259 09 000201 It failed in opening of the text file. It failed in opening of the text file.
260 09 000202 It failed in reading of the text file. It failed in reading of the text file.
261 09 000203 It failed in the printing of the text file. It failed in the printing of the text file.
262 09 000301 It failed in opening of BitMap. It failed in opening of BitMap.
263 09 000302 It failed in reading of BitMap. It failed in reading of BitMap.
BitMap is not a Windows form.
264 09 000303 BitMap is not a Windows form.
(It is in such cases as the OS/2 form)
265 09 000304 It failed in the printing of BitMap. It failed in the printing of BitMap.
266 0A 000200 Started PVCLogService Started PVCLogService.
267 0A 000201 Finished PVCLogService Finished PVCLogService.
Failed to connect with KICS at starting
268 0A 000202 Failed to start PVCLogService
PVCLogService.
Finished PVCLogService because of lack of
269 0A 000203 Finished PVCLogService incorrect
memory.
270 0A 000204 PVCLogService Proxy failure Can't communicate at proxy.
271 0A 000205 Started to delete ASCII Files Started to delete ASCII Files.
272 0A 000206 Finished to delete ASCII Files Finished to delete ASCII Files.
273 0A 000207 Failed to delete ASCII Files Failed to delete ASCII Files.
274 0A 000208 Failed to open the event DB Failed to open the event DB.
275 0A 000210 Started to write the ASCII File. Started to write the ASCII File. [@Filename]
276 0A 000211 Finished to write the ASCII File. Finished to write the ASCII File. [@Filename]
277 0A 000212 Failed to write the ASCII File. Failed to write the ASCII File. [@Filename]
278 0A 000213 Lot Control. Recorded the lot starting point. [@Filename]
279 0A 000214 Lot Control. Changed the lot starting point. [@Filename]
280 0A 000215 Lot Control. Recorded the lot starting point. [@Filename]
281 0A 000216 Lot Control. Changed the lot ending point. [@Filename]
282 0A 000217 Lot Control. Initialize the lot counter. [@Filename]
283 0B 000200 (PVCFASock) Started FASOCKService (PVCFASock) FASOCKService is started.
284 0B 000201 (PVCFASock) Finished FASOCKService (PVCFASock) FASOCKService finished.
(PVCFASock) Failed to connect with KICService at
285 0B 000202 (PVCFASock) Failed to start FASOCKService
starting FASOCKService.
286 0B 000203 (PVCFASock) FASOCKServer correct return (PVCFASock) FASOCKServer return from error.
287 0B 00020F (PVCFASock) Finished upload production data (PVCFASock) Finished upload production data.
(PVCFASock) Packet data length (LNG) is (PVCFASock) FASOCK Packet length (LNG) is
288 0B 000210
incorrect incorrect.
(PVCFASock) Packet Block MAX (BMX) is (PVCFASock) FASOCK Block MAX (BMX) is
289 0B 000211
incorrect incorrect.
290 0B 000212 (PVCFASock) Packet Block No (BNO) is incorrect (PVCFASock) FASOCK Block No (BNO) is incorrect.

Page 9-62 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
(PVCFASock) Packet send side
291 0B 000213
Host/Line/Machine/HostName is incorrect
(PVCFASock) FASOCK send side is incorrect.
(PVCFASock) Packet receive side
292 0B 000214
Host/Line/Machine/HostName is incorrect
(PVCFASock) FASOCK receive side is incorrect.
(PVCFASock) Packet main command (CMD1) is (PVCFASock) FASOCK main command (CMD1) is
293 0B 000215
incorrect incorrect.
(PVCFASock) Packet sub command (CMD2) is (PVCFASock) FASOCK sub command (CMD2) is
294 0B 000216
incorrect incorrect.
295 0B 000217 (PVCFASock) Packet code (COD) is incorrect (PVCFASock) FASOCK code (COD) is incorrect.
296 0B 000218 (PVCFASock) Packet data is incorrect (PVCFASock) FASOCK data is incorrect.
297 0B 000219 (PVCFASock) Packet protocol version is incorrect (PVCFASock) FASOCK version is incorrect.
298 0B 000230 (PVCFASock) FASOCK communication error (PVCFASock) Communication is time-out with MC.
299 0B 000231 (PVCFASock) FASOCK communication error (PVCFASock) Communication is time-out with KICS.
300 0B 000232 (PVCFASock) FASOCK communication error (PVCFASock) Can't connect with MC.
301 0B 000233 (PVCFASock) Data file is incorrect (PVCFASock) Can't open data file.
302 0B 000234 (PVCFASock) Data file is incorrect (PVCFASock) Can't write in data file.
303 0B 000235 (PVCFASock) Data file is incorrect (PVCFASock) Can't read data file.
304 0B 000236 (PVCFASock) Data file is incorrect (PVCFASock) Can't delete data file.
305 0B 000237 (PVCFASock) Failed to create socket (PVCFASock) Can't create socket.
(PVCFASock) There is no reply because of cut line
306 0B 00025C (PVCFASock) Can't communicate
or power off,etc.
307 30 000000 Started PTShell Started PTShell
308 30 000001 Finished PTShell Finished PTShell
Logged on PT System.
309 30 000002 Logged on PT System.
[@CurrentUser][@CurrentMode]
Logged off from PT System.
310 30 000003 Logged off from PT System.
[@CurrentUser][@CurrentMode]
311 30 000004 Shut downed,System shut downed. Shut downed,System shut downed.
312 30 000005 Restarted,System restarted. Restarted,System restarted.
313 31 000000 Started Filer Started Filer
314 31 000001 Finished Filer Finished Filer
315 31 001000 There is no information of Machine in lot data. There is no information of Machine in lot data.
316 31 001001 Can't find registered PTFile. Can't find registered PTFile.
317 32 000000 Started EventLogger Started EventLogger
318 32 000001 Finished EventLogger Finished EventLogger

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-63

9.4 Event List

9.4.2 Machine Event List

Main Event Sub Event
No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
1 01 000000 Change to local control Changed to local control
2 02 000000 Change to remote control Changed to remote control
3 03 010000 Main menu Start at Main menu
4 03 010001 Main menu Exit Main menu
5 03 020000 Data edit Start at editing Data
6 03 020001 Data edit Exit editing Data
7 03 030000 MC parameter edit Start at editing MC parameter
8 03 030001 MC parameter edit Exit editing MC parameter
9 03 040000 Data teaching Start at Data teaching
10 03 040001 Data teaching Exit Data teaching
11 03 050000 Manual operation Start at Manual operation
12 03 050001 Manual operation Exit Manual operation
13 03 060000 MC configuration Start at MC configuration
14 03 060001 MC configuration Exit MC configuration
15 03 070000 File operation Start at File operation
16 03 070001 File operation Exit File operation
17 03 080000 Reference production data Start at Reference production data
18 03 080001 Reference production data Exit Reference production data
19 03 090000 Other menu operation Start at Other menu operation
20 03 090001 Other menu operation Exit Other menu operation
21 03 100000 Power on (READY) Start at Power on (READY)
22 03 100001 Power on (READY) Exit Power on (READY)
23 03 110000 Auto operation Start at Auto operation
24 03 110001 Auto operation Exit Auto operation
25 03 120000 Wait for pre process Start at Wait for pre process
26 03 120001 Wait for pre process Exit Wait for pre process
27 03 130000 Wait for post process Start at Wait for post process
28 03 130001 Wait for post process Exit Wait for post process
29 03 140000 Single stop Start at Single stop
30 03 140001 Single stop Exit Single stop
31 03 150000 Cycle stop Start at Cycle stop
32 03 150001 Cycle stop Exit Cycle stop
33 03 160000 Trouble stop Trouble stop Code
34 03 160001 Trouble stop Command Stop
35 03 160002 Trouble stop Cycle Stop
36 03 160003 Trouble stop Single Stop
37 03 160004 Trouble stop Production end stop
38 03 160005 Trouble stop Power on stop
39 03 160006 Trouble stop Data editing stop
40 03 160007 Trouble stop Emergency switch ON
41 03 160008 Trouble stop Servo Switch OFF
42 03 160009 Trouble stop Air pressure drop
43 03 160010 Trouble stop DC5V power trouble
44 03 160011 Trouble stop Area sensor detect
45 03 160012 Trouble stop Cover open stop
46 03 160013 Trouble stop Illegal machine data
47 03 160014 Trouble stop Illegal function switch
48 03 160015 Trouble stop Illegal machine parameter
49 03 160016 Trouble stop Illegal recognition data
50 03 160017 Trouble stop PCB transport error

Page 9-64 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
51 03 160019 Trouble stop Control box fan trouble
52 03 160020 Trouble stop Width adjust error
53 03 160021 Trouble stop Sub-conveyor adjust error
54 03 160022 Trouble stop Board recog error
55 03 160023 Trouble stop Chip recog error
56 03 160024 Trouble stop Parts empty stop
57 03 160025 Trouble stop Production end signal ON
58 03 160026 Trouble stop Board holder error
59 03 160027 Trouble stop Recog communication error
60 03 160028 Trouble stop Front Cover open
61 03 160029 Trouble stop Rear Cover open
62 03 160030 Trouble stop CPU power supply fault
63 03 160031 Trouble stop PRU power supply fault
64 03 160032 Trouble stop Emergency line signal ON
65 03 160033 Trouble stop Line air pressure drop
66 03 160034 Trouble stop Counter error
67 03 160035 Trouble stop Returning to origin error
68 03 160036 Trouble stop Feedback error
69 03 160037 Trouble stop Data error (SoftLimit)
70 03 160038 Trouble stop (+) Overrun
71 03 160039 Trouble stop (−) Overrun
72 03 160040 Trouble stop Driver error
73 03 160041 Trouble stop Positioning error
74 03 160042 Trouble stop Command write protection error
75 03 160043 Trouble stop Servo OFF
76 03 160044 Trouble stop Power OFF
77 03 160045 Trouble stop Command error
78 03 160046 Trouble stop Disconnection fiber line
79 03 160047 Trouble stop Interlock error
80 03 160049 Trouble stop Axis controller communication error
81 03 160051 Trouble stop Conveyor width adjust error
82 03 160052 Trouble stop Vacuum pump trouble
83 03 160053 Trouble stop Power box over heat
84 03 160054 Trouble stop CPU box over heat
85 03 160055 Trouble stop Front conveyor trouble
86 03 160056 Trouble stop Center conveyor trouble
87 03 160057 Trouble stop Rear conveyor trouble
88 03 160058 Trouble stop 80C31 watching error
89 03 160059 Trouble stop DC power trouble
90 03 160100 Trouble stop Alarm
91 03 160101 Trouble stop Parts empty
92 03 160102 Trouble stop Parts empty reset
93 03 160103 Trouble stop Parts empty warning
94 03 160104 Trouble stop Chip pickup error
95 03 160105 Trouble stop Chip height error
96 03 160106 Trouble stop Chip recog error
97 03 160107 Trouble stop Mount error
98 03 160400 Trouble stop
99 03 160401 Trouble stop
100 03 160402 Trouble stop

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-65

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
101 03 160403 Trouble stop
102 03 160404 Trouble stop
103 03 160405 Trouble stop
104 03 160406 Trouble stop
105 03 160407 Trouble stop
106 03 160408 Trouble stop
107 03 160409 Trouble stop
108 03 160410 Trouble stop
109 03 160411 Trouble stop
110 03 160412 Trouble stop
111 03 160413 Trouble stop
112 03 160414 Trouble stop
113 03 160415 Trouble stop
114 03 160416 Trouble stop
115 03 160417 Trouble stop
116 03 160418 Trouble stop
117 03 160419 Trouble stop
118 03 160420 Trouble stop
119 03 160421 Trouble stop
120 03 160422 Trouble stop
121 03 160423 Trouble stop
122 03 160424 Trouble stop
123 03 160425 Trouble stop
124 03 160426 Trouble stop
125 03 160427 Trouble stop
126 03 160428 Trouble stop
127 03 160429 Trouble stop
128 03 160430 Trouble stop
129 03 160431 Trouble stop
130 03 160432 Trouble stop
131 03 160433 Trouble stop
132 03 160434 Trouble stop
133 03 160435 Trouble stop
134 03 160436 Trouble stop
135 03 160437 Trouble stop
136 03 160438 Trouble stop
137 03 160439 Trouble stop
138 03 160440 Trouble stop
139 03 160441 Trouble stop
140 03 160442 Trouble stop
141 03 160443 Trouble stop
142 03 160444 Trouble stop
143 03 160445 Trouble stop
144 03 160446 Trouble stop
145 03 160447 Trouble stop
146 03 160448 Trouble stop
147 03 160449 Trouble stop
148 03 160450 Trouble stop
149 03 161001 Trouble stop PCB transport error
150 03 161002 Trouble stop Servo Switch Off

Page 9-66 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
151 03 161003 Trouble stop Left conveyor width adjustment Time-out
152 03 161004 Trouble stop Left conveyor width adjustment (−) Over run
153 03 161005 Trouble stop Center conveyor width adjustment Time-out
154 03 161006 Trouble stop Center conveyor width adjustment (−) Over run
155 03 161007 Trouble stop Right conveyor width adjustment Time-out
156 03 161008 Trouble stop Right conveyor width adjustment (−) Over run
157 03 161011 Trouble stop Squeegee (F) up Time-out
158 03 161012 Trouble stop Squeegee (F) + Over run
159 03 161013 Trouble stop Squeegee (R) up Time-out
160 03 161014 Trouble stop Squeegee (R) + Over run
161 03 161016 Trouble stop Cleaning nozzle down error
162 03 161017 Trouble stop Cleaning nozzle up error
163 03 161018 Trouble stop PCB Positioning Error
164 03 161022 Trouble stop PCB Upper Guard Position Error
165 03 161023 Trouble stop Printing Range Limit Over
166 03 161027 Trouble stop Squeegee Origin Position Error
167 03 161028 Trouble stop Squeegee Open Error
168 03 161031 Trouble stop Mask Clamp Position Error
169 03 161035 Trouble stop Atmosphere Temperature Abnormal
170 03 161036 Trouble stop Paste Cartridge Empty
171 03 161038 Trouble stop Squeegee (F) Down Error
172 03 161039 Trouble stop Squeegee (R) Down Error
173 03 161048 Trouble stop Cleaning Interlock Error
174 03 161051 Trouble stop Mask Clamp ON Error
175 03 161054 Trouble stop Cleaning Stroke Limit Error
176 03 161056 Trouble stop DC Down
177 03 161057 Trouble stop Mask Recognition Error
178 03 161100 Trouble stop Cleaning Unit Set NG
179 03 161101 Trouble stop Cleaning Unit Origin Position Error
180 03 161102 Trouble stop Cleaning Unit Link Error
181 03 161103 Trouble stop Cleaning Unit Secure Error
182 03 161108 Trouble stop Lifter Origin Position Error
183 03 161109 Trouble stop Print Pressure Data Abnormal
184 03 161110 Trouble stop Paste Recognition Error
185 03 161111 Trouble stop Lifter Shaft Brake Off
186 03 161112 Trouble stop Under Guard Shaft Brake Off
187 03 161113 Trouble stop PCB Stopper Return Error
188 03 161114 Trouble stop θ Shaft (+) Over run Error
189 03 161115 Trouble stop θ Shaft (−) Over run Error
190 03 161117 Trouble stop F → R Conveyor Transport Error
191 03 161118 Trouble stop Center Conveyor Transport Error
192 03 161119 Trouble stop C → R Conveyor Transport Error
193 03 161131 Trouble stop X-axis origin position error
194 03 161239 Alarm Code Error
195 03 161400 Trouble stop Camera unit interference
196 03 161401 Trouble stop Squeegee (F) up timeout
197 03 161402 Trouble stop Squeegee (R) up timeout
198 03 161403 Trouble stop Print unit down error
199 03 161404 Trouble stop Print unit up timeout
200 03 161405 Trouble stop Fill in plate down error

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-67

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
201 03 161406 Trouble stop Fill in plate up timeout
202 03 161407 Trouble stop PCB stopper out error
203 03 161408 Trouble stop PCB stopper in error
204 03 161409 Trouble stop PCB stopper joint error
205 03 161410 Trouble stop PCB stopper joint return error
206 03 161411 Trouble stop PCB stopper position initialization error
207 03 161412 Trouble stop Camera height error (Upper)
208 03 161413 Trouble stop Camera height error (Middle)
209 03 161414 Trouble stop Camera height error (Lower)
210 03 161415 Trouble stop PCB position error (PCB stays between conveyors)
211 03 161416 Trouble stop Camera Y-axis origin position error
212 03 161417 Trouble stop Squeegee escape position error
213 03 163001 Trouble stop Head up limit sensor does not turn on.
214 03 163002 Trouble stop Head middle position sensor is off.
215 03 163003 Trouble stop C conv.stopper return error
216 03 163004 Trouble stop PCB transport error
217 03 163005 Trouble stop PMD overheat stop
218 03 163006 Trouble stop θ axis time-out
219 03 163007 Trouble stop 80C31 watching error
220 03 163008 Trouble stop X^Y data limit error
221 03 163011 Trouble stop Head can't down the position.
222 03 165001 Trouble stop Disconnection fiber line (Axis controller)
223 03 165002 Trouble stop ZA-axis cushion end error
224 03 165003 Trouble stop ZB-axis cushion end error
225 03 165004 Trouble stop ZC-axis cushion end error
226 03 165005 Trouble stop Tape feeder setting error (#1)
227 03 165006 Trouble stop Tape feeder setting error (#2)
228 03 165007 Trouble stop Conveyor width adjust interlock
229 03 165008 Trouble stop Recog scan height error
230 03 165009 Trouble stop Z axis going up error after recog scan
231 03 165010 Trouble stop PCB stage rise interlock error
232 03 165011 Trouble stop Tape feeder setting error (#3)
233 03 165012 Trouble stop Tape feeder setting error (#4)
234 03 165018 Trouble stop Chip eject conveyor sensor fault
235 03 165035 Trouble stop PMD overheat stop
236 03 165036 Trouble stop RS485 communication error
237 03 165038 Trouble stop Head fault
238 03 165039 Trouble stop Head not up
239 03 165040 Trouble stop Nozzle interlock
240 03 165044 Trouble stop Laser counter error
241 03 165045 Trouble stop Laser recognition error
242 03 165055 Trouble stop Z^SL-axis brake open error
243 03 165063 Trouble stop Disconnection I/O fiber line #1
244 03 165064 Trouble stop Disconnection I/O fiber line #2
245 03 165065 Trouble stop Disconnection I/O fiber line #3
246 03 165066 Trouble stop Disconnection I/O fiber line #4
247 03 165067 Trouble stop Disconnection I/O fiber line #5
248 03 165068 Trouble stop Disconnection I/O fiber line #6
249 03 165069 Trouble stop Disconnection I/O fiber line #7
250 03 165070 Trouble stop Disconnection I/O fiber line #8

Page 9-68 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
251 03 165071 Trouble stop Disconnection optical ring #0
252 03 165072 Trouble stop Disconnection optical ring #1
253 03 165073 Trouble stop Disconnection optical ring #2
254 03 165074 Trouble stop Disconnection optical ring #3 (DT10F (#2) )
255 03 165075 Trouble stop Disconnection optical ring #4 (DT10F (#3) )
256 03 165076 Trouble stop Disconnection optical ring #5 (DT20F (#2) )
257 03 165077 Trouble stop Disconnection optical ring #6 (DT20F (#3) )
258 03 165078 Trouble stop Disconnection optical ring #7
259 03 165079 Trouble stop Disconnection optical ring #8-15
260 03 165080 Trouble stop Optical ring ACK error
261 03 165081 Trouble stop Optical ring communication error
262 03 165082 Trouble stop RS485 communication error #3
263 03 165083 Trouble stop RS485 communication error #4
264 03 165084 Trouble stop RS485 communication error #5
265 03 165108 Trouble stop Tray feeder interference
266 03 165117 Trouble stop Flux unit cover open
267 03 165119 Trouble stop Holder up timeout error
268 03 165120 Trouble stop Holder down timeout error
269 03 165126 Trouble stop SL axis lower position error
270 03 165201 Trouble stop DT10F (#2) T1-axis height error
271 03 165202 Trouble stop DT10F (#2) T2-axis height error
272 03 165203 Trouble stop DT10F (#2) T3-axis height error
273 03 165205 Trouble stop DT10F (#2) axis step out
274 03 165206 Trouble stop DT10F (#2) escape alarm
275 03 165221 Trouble stop DT10F (#3) T1-axis height error
276 03 165222 Trouble stop DT10F (#3) T2-axis height error
277 03 165223 Trouble stop DT10F (#3) T3-axis height error
278 03 165225 Trouble stop DT10F (#3) axis step out
279 03 165226 Trouble stop DT10F (#3) escape alarm
280 03 165302 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) pickup side shutter open error
281 03 165303 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) pickup side shutter close error
282 03 165304 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) pickup side pallet empty error
283 03 165305 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) pickup side pallet exist error
284 03 165306 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) supply side shutter open error
285 03 165307 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) supply side shutter close error
286 03 165308 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) supply side pallet empty error
287 03 165309 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) supply side pallet exist error
288 03 165313 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) empty tray eject pad up error
289 03 165315 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) supply side pallet chuck error
290 03 165318 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) Brake open error
291 03 165319 Trouble stop DT20F (#2) TL-TP axis interlock error
292 03 165332 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) pickup side shutter open error
293 03 165333 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) pickup side shutter close error
294 03 165334 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) pickup side pallet empty error
295 03 165335 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) pickup side pallet exist error
296 03 165336 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) supply side shutter open error
297 03 165337 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) supply side shutter close error
298 03 165338 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) supply side pallet empty error
299 03 165339 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) supply side pallet exist error
300 03 165343 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) empty tray eject pad up error

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-69

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
301 03 165345 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) supply side pallet chuck error
302 03 165348 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) Brake open error
303 03 165349 Trouble stop DT20F (#3) TL-TP axis interlock error
304 03 165401 Trouble stop Tape feed not at return position
305 03 165402 Trouble stop Z-axis origin offset abnormal
306 03 165403 Trouble stop X-axis overrun
307 03 165404 Trouble stop Y-axis overrun
308 03 165405 Trouble stop L-axis overrun
309 03 165406 Trouble stop Tray unit communication error
310 03 165407 Trouble stop Tray trouble
311 03 165408 Trouble stop Tray error data receive wait
312 03 165409 Trouble stop Exit port fault
313 03 165410 Trouble stop Pallet chuck fault
314 03 165411 Trouble stop Scattering plate cylinder not proceed
315 03 165412 Trouble stop Scattering plate cylinder not return
316 03 165413 Trouble stop Interference with scattering plate
317 03 165414 Trouble stop Cutter blade not at return position
318 03 165415 Trouble stop Stage not ready
319 03 165416 Trouble stop Sub stage not ready
320 03 165417 Trouble stop Feeder base set up not complete
321 03 165418 Trouble stop Z axis cylinder up error
322 03 165419 Trouble stop Chuck origin sensor off
323 03 165420 Trouble stop Laser interlock switch off
324 03 165421 Trouble stop Scattering plate position error
325 03 165422 Trouble stop Tray lifter overrun
326 03 165423 Trouble stop Tray X axis overrun
327 03 165424 Trouble stop Tray Y axis overrun
328 03 165425 Trouble stop Tray head up error
329 03 165426 Trouble stop Laser unit fault
330 03 165427 Trouble stop Z axis driver error
331 03 165428 Trouble stop Z axis driver EMG stop
332 03 165429 Trouble stop Z axis driver command error
333 03 165430 Trouble stop Z axis driver parameter error
334 03 165431 Trouble stop Z axis driver communication error
335 03 165432 Trouble stop Z axis driver low voltage error
336 03 165433 Trouble stop Z axis driver watch dog error
337 03 165434 Trouble stop Z axis driver memory fault 2
338 03 165435 Trouble stop Z axis driver motor combination fault
339 03 165436 Trouble stop Z axis driver board fault
340 03 165437 Trouble stop Z axis driver encoder fault
341 03 165438 Trouble stop Z axis driver regenerate fault
342 03 165439 Trouble stop Z axis driver over-speed error
343 03 165440 Trouble stop Z axis driver over-current error
344 03 165441 Trouble stop Z axis driver over-voltage error
345 03 165442 Trouble stop Z axis driver parameter error
346 03 165443 Trouble stop Z axis driver overload error
347 03 165444 Trouble stop Z axis driver variation excess error
348 03 165445 Trouble stop Z axis driver (−) overrun
349 03 165446 Trouble stop Z axis driver (+) overrun
350 03 165447 Trouble stop Z axis driver height detect error

Page 9-70 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
351 03 165448 Trouble stop θ axis driver error
352 03 165449 Trouble stop θ axis driver CPU fault
353 03 165450 Trouble stop θ axis driver enforced magnetize SW ON
354 03 165451 Trouble stop θ axis driver protect circuit trip
355 03 165452 Trouble stop θ axis driver motor disconnection
356 03 165453 Trouble stop θ axis driver command disable
357 03 165454 Trouble stop θ axis driver command error
358 03 165455 Trouble stop θ axis driver step out
359 03 165456 Trouble stop θ axis driver status condition 1
360 03 165457 Trouble stop θ axis driver status condition 2
361 03 165458 Trouble stop θ axis driver status condition 3
362 03 165459 Trouble stop θ axis driver overheat
363 03 165460 Trouble stop Z axis Interlock position
364 03 165461 Trouble stop Z axis not in position
365 03 165462 Trouble stop Momentary power OFF error
366 03 165464 Trouble stop Command disable
367 03 165464 Trouble stop SH EMG NG
368 03 165466 Trouble stop Current I/O communication error
369 03 165467 Trouble stop Wire ring error
370 03 165468 Trouble stop Wire ring parity error
371 03 165469 Trouble stop Wire ring disconnection error
372 03 165470 Trouble stop Wire ring sequence error
373 03 165471 Trouble stop Wire ring ACK error
374 03 165472 Trouble stop Wire ring interrupt time-out error
375 03 165473 Trouble stop Wire ring data length error
376 03 165474 Trouble stop X axis interlock error
377 03 165475 Trouble stop Y axis interlock error
378 03 165476 Trouble stop Axis error
379 03 165477 Trouble stop Emergency detect (Axis ctrl)
380 03 165478 Trouble stop Cover open detect (Axis ctrl)
381 03 165479 Trouble stop Servo SW OFF detect (Axis ctrl)
382 03 165480 Trouble stop Safety Ready detect (Axis ctrl)
383 03 165481 Trouble stop Safety relay error detect (Axis ctrl)
384 03 165482 Trouble stop Wire ring EMG detect (Axis ctrl)
385 03 165483 Trouble stop Wire ring watchdog (Axis ctrl)
386 03 165484 Trouble stop X axis encoder disconnection (Axis ctrl)
387 03 165485 Trouble stop X axis returning to origin error
388 03 165486 Trouble stop Y axis returning to origin error
389 03 165487 Trouble stop Z axis returning to origin error
390 03 165488 Trouble stop T axis returning to origin error
391 03 165489 Trouble stop Driver alarm
392 03 165490 Trouble stop Driver hardware error
393 03 165491 Trouble stop Action time-out
394 03 165492 Trouble stop Width adjust error
395 03 165493 Trouble stop Vacuum check error
396 03 165494 Trouble stop Reference set error
397 03 165495 Trouble stop X axis (+) overrun
398 03 165496 Trouble stop X axis (−) overrun
399 03 165497 Trouble stop X axis driver error
400 03 165498 Trouble stop Y axis (+) overrun

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-71

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
401 03 165499 Trouble stop Y axis (−) overrun
402 03 165500 Trouble stop Y axis driver error
403 03 165501 Trouble stop PCB vacuum connection fault
404 03 165502 Trouble stop Vacuum pump connection fault
405 03 165504 Trouble stop Y axis encoder disconnection (Axis ctrl)
406 03 165505 Trouble stop Linear encoder disconnection (Axis ctrl)
407 03 165506 Trouble stop CPU interlock detect (Axis ctrl)
408 03 165507 Trouble stop Feeder interlock detect (Axis ctrl)
409 03 165508 Trouble stop Current loop busy detect (Axis ctrl)
410 03 165509 Trouble stop Current loop EMG detect (Axis ctrl)
411 03 165511 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) CPU watchdog error detect
412 03 165512 Trouble stop CM20F side EMG signal detect
413 03 165513 Trouble stop DT30F side EMG signal detect
414 03 165514 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) magazine door open detect
415 03 165515 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) overrun signal detect
416 03 165516 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) TL/TP axis exclusive move error
417 03 165517 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) TL axis driver error
418 03 165518 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) TP axis driver error
419 03 165519 Trouble stop CM20F side servo SW OFF detect
420 03 165520 Trouble stop DT30F side servo SW OFF detect
421 03 165521 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) servo not ready detect
422 03 165522 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) self hold circuit open
423 03 165523 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) in position time-out
424 03 165524 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) soft limit over
425 03 165525 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) TP axis move in a shutter closed condition
426 03 165526 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) tray height error
427 03 165527 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) pickup side pallet exist error (not return)
428 03 165528 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) pickup side pallet pull error
429 03 165529 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) axis command error
430 03 165530 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) axis command duplicated
431 03 165531 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) axis start time-out
432 03 165532 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) slave time-out
433 03 165533 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) receive checksum error
434 03 165534 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) transmit error
435 03 165535 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) unknown error
436 03 165536 Trouble stop DT30F (#2) alarm signal detect
437 03 167403 Trouble stop Front Cover open
438 03 167404 Trouble stop Rear Cover open
439 03 167405 Trouble stop Rear center safety cover open
440 03 167406 Trouble stop A stage safety cover open
441 03 167407 Trouble stop B stage safety cover open
442 03 167408 Trouble stop Board holder up error
443 03 167409 Trouble stop Board holder down error
444 03 167410 Trouble stop AdhesiveTape feed interlock
445 03 167411 Trouble stop Tape feed interlock
446 03 167412 Trouble stop Pickup head interlock
447 03 167413 Trouble stop Mount head interlock
448 03 167414 Trouble stop Width adjust start check err
449 03 167415 Trouble stop Blower over heat
450 03 167416 Trouble stop Vacuum pump over heat

Page 9-72 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
451 03 167417 Trouble stop Table X-axis motion partial
452 03 167418 Trouble stop Table Y-axis motion partial
453 03 167419 Trouble stop A stage-axis motion partial
454 03 167420 Trouble stop B stage-axis motion partial
455 03 167421 Trouble stop Pickup height motor error
456 03 167422 Trouble stop Chip send select partial
457 03 167423 Trouble stop Table Z-axis motor error
458 03 167424 Trouble stop C conveyor motor driver err
459 03 167425 Trouble stop Pick Z-axis motor driver err
460 03 167426 Trouble stop L width adjust motor driver error
461 03 167427 Trouble stop R width adjust motor driver error
462 03 167428 Trouble stop Camera X-axis motor driver error
463 03 167429 Trouble stop Camera Y-axis motor driver error
464 03 167430 Trouble stop Tape feed changeover driver error
465 03 167431 Trouble stop Table Z-axis motor driver error
466 03 167432 Trouble stop Camera X-axis (−) overrun
467 03 167433 Trouble stop Camera X-axis (+) overrun
468 03 167434 Trouble stop Camera Y-axis (−) overrun
469 03 167435 Trouble stop Camera Y-axis (+) overrun
470 03 167436 Trouble stop Table Z-axis (−) overrun
471 03 167437 Trouble stop Table Z-axis (+) overrun
472 03 167438 Trouble stop Astage tape float error
473 03 167439 Trouble stop Bstage tape float error
474 03 167800 Trouble stop Head θ error
475 03 167801 Trouble stop Head θ time out error
476 03 167802 Trouble stop Head θ no response error
477 03 167803 Trouble stop Head θ communication error
478 03 167804 Trouble stop Head θ motion incomplete
479 03 167805 Trouble stop Head θ is bad head
480 03 167806 Trouble stop Head θ origin motion incomplete
481 03 167807 Trouble stop Head θ data read error
482 03 167808 Trouble stop Head θ unknown error
483 03 167809 Trouble stop Head θ controller error
484 03 168971 Trouble stop Nozzle return interlock
485 03 168972 Trouble stop Nozzle extend interlock
486 03 168973 Trouble stop Mount height motor error
487 03 168974 Trouble stop Camera X-axis motion partial
488 03 168975 Trouble stop Camera Y-axis motion partial
489 03 168976 Trouble stop Pickup head drop
490 03 168977 Trouble stop Mount head drop
491 03 168978 Trouble stop Pulse motor driver error
492 03 168979 Trouble stop Tape feed interlock
493 03 168980 Trouble stop XY-axis driver power trouble
494 03 168981 Trouble stop Dust box interlock
495 03 168982 Trouble stop Chip measure error
496 03 168983 Trouble stop Pickup miss stop
497 03 168984 Trouble stop Station shutter error
498 03 168985 Trouble stop Fence open
499 03 168986 Trouble stop NG blow interlock
500 03 168987 Trouble stop Mount blow interlock

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-73

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
501 03 168988 Trouble stop Pair Diode stop
502 03 168989 Trouble stop Stage interlock
503 03 168990 Trouble stop Bad head stop
504 03 168991 Trouble stop Recognition NG stop
505 03 168992 Trouble stop Chip height fault
506 03 168994 Trouble stop Shutter close error
507 03 168995 Trouble stop Shutter open error
508 03 169201 Trouble stop Left PCB holder up error
509 03 169202 Trouble stop Right PCB holder up error
510 03 169203 Trouble stop Left PCB holder down error
511 03 169204 Trouble stop Right PCB holder down error
512 03 169205 Trouble stop Chip send left select error (Main side)
513 03 169206 Trouble stop Chip send left select error (Sub side)
514 03 169207 Trouble stop Chip send Right select error (Main side)
515 03 169208 Trouble stop Chip send right select error (Sub side)
516 03 169209 Trouble stop Left table set error (Main side)
517 03 169210 Trouble stop Left table set error (Sub side)
518 03 169211 Trouble stop Left table extract error (Main side)
519 03 169212 Trouble stop Left table extract error (Sub side)
520 03 169213 Trouble stop Right table set error (Main side)
521 03 169214 Trouble stop Right table set error (Sub side)
522 03 169215 Trouble stop Right table extract error (Main side)
523 03 169216 Trouble stop Right table extract error (Sub side)
524 03 169217 Trouble stop Nozzle changer open error (Main side)
525 03 169218 Trouble stop Nozzle changer open error (Sub side)
526 03 169219 Trouble stop Nozzle changer close error (Main side)
527 03 169220 Trouble stop Nozzle changer close error (Sub side)
528 03 169221 Trouble stop Width adjust start check err
529 03 169222 Trouble stop Vacuum pump over heat
530 03 169223 Trouble stop X-axis motion incomplete (Main side)
531 03 169224 Trouble stop X-axis motion incomplete (Sub side)
532 03 169225 Trouble stop Y-axis motion incomplete (Main side)
533 03 169226 Trouble stop Y-axis motion incomplete (Sub side)
534 03 169227 Trouble stop Z-axis motion incomplete (Main side)
535 03 169228 Trouble stop Z-axis motion incomplete (Sub side)
536 03 169229 Trouble stop θ-axis motion incomplete (Main side)
537 03 169230 Trouble stop θ-axis motion incomplete (Sub side)
538 03 169231 Trouble stop X-axis soft parameter error (Main side)
539 03 169232 Trouble stop X-axis soft parameter error (Sub side)
540 03 169233 Trouble stop Y-axis soft parameter error (Main side)
541 03 169234 Trouble stop Y-axis soft parameter error (Sub side)
542 03 169235 Trouble stop Z-axis soft parameter error (Main side)
543 03 169236 Trouble stop Z-axis soft parameter error (Sub side)
544 03 169237 Trouble stop θ-axis soft parameter error (Main side)
545 03 169238 Trouble stop θ-axis soft parameter error (Sub side)
546 03 170000 Production end Start at Production end
547 03 170001 Production end Exit Production end
548 03 180000 Alarm Trouble stop Code
549 03 180001 Alarm Command Stop
550 03 180002 Alarm Cycle Stop

Page 9-74 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
551 03 180003 Alarm Single Stop
552 03 180004 Alarm Production end stop
553 03 180005 Alarm Power on stop
554 03 180006 Alarm Data editing stop
555 03 180007 Alarm Emergency switch ON
556 03 180008 Alarm Servo Switch OFF
557 03 180009 Alarm Air pressure drop
558 03 180010 Alarm DC5V power trouble
559 03 180011 Alarm Area sensor detect
560 03 180012 Alarm Cover open stop
561 03 180013 Alarm Illegal machine data
562 03 180014 Alarm Illegal function switch
563 03 180015 Alarm Illegal machine parameter
564 03 180016 Alarm Illegal recognition data
565 03 180017 Alarm PCB transport error
566 03 180018 Alarm Pin positioning error
567 03 180019 Alarm Control box fan trouble
568 03 180020 Alarm Width adjust error
569 03 180021 Alarm Sub-conveyor adjust error
570 03 180022 Alarm Board recog error
571 03 180023 Alarm Chip recog error
572 03 180024 Alarm Parts empty stop
573 03 180025 Alarm Production end signal ON
574 03 180026 Alarm Board holder error
575 03 180027 Alarm Recog communication error
576 03 180028 Alarm Front Cover open
577 03 180029 Alarm Rear Cover open
578 03 180030 Alarm CPU power supply fault
579 03 180031 Alarm PRU power supply fault
580 03 180032 Alarm Emergency line signal ON
581 03 180033 Alarm Line air pressure drop
582 03 180034 Alarm Counter error
583 03 180035 Alarm Returning to origin error
584 03 180036 Alarm Feedback error
585 03 180037 Alarm Data error (SoftLimit)
586 03 180038 Alarm (+) Overrun
587 03 180039 Alarm (−) Overrun
588 03 180040 Alarm Driver error
589 03 180041 Alarm Positioning error
590 03 180042 Alarm Command write protection error
591 03 180043 Alarm Servo OFF
592 03 180044 Alarm Power OFF
593 03 180045 Alarm Command error
594 03 180046 Alarm Disconnection fiber line
595 03 180047 Alarm Interlock error
596 03 180051 Alarm Conveyor width adjust error
597 03 180052 Alarm Vacuum pump trouble
598 03 180053 Alarm Power box over heat
599 03 180054 Alarm CPU box over heat
600 03 180055 Alarm Front conveyor trouble

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-75

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
601 03 180056 Alarm Center conveyor trouble
602 03 180057 Alarm Rear conveyor trouble
603 03 180058 Alarm 80C31 watching error
604 03 180059 Alarm DC power trouble
605 03 180060 Alarm Cpu^Power box Over heat
606 03 180062 Alarm Pin positioning set error
607 03 180100 Alarm Alarm
608 03 180101 Alarm Parts empty
609 03 180102 Alarm Parts empty reset
610 03 180103 Alarm Parts empty warning
611 03 180104 Alarm Chip pickup error
612 03 180105 Alarm Chip height error
613 03 180106 Alarm Chip recog error
614 03 180107 Alarm Mount error
615 03 180108 Alarm Start on
616 03 180109 Alarm Production end signal detected
617 03 180110 Alarm NG chip full warning
618 03 180111 Alarm Self diagnosis error
619 03 180112 Alarm Illegal product data
620 03 180113 Alarm Illegal machine parameter
621 03 180114 Alarm Bad head
622 03 180115 Alarm Parts empty exist (Mount impossible)
623 03 180116 Alarm PT communication time-out
624 03 180117 Alarm PT recog data not exist
625 03 180118 Alarm PT communication error
626 03 180119 Alarm Illegal Production configuration data
627 03 180120 Alarm Illegal Machine configuration data
628 03 180400 Alarm
629 03 180401 Alarm
630 03 180402 Alarm
631 03 180403 Alarm
632 03 180404 Alarm
633 03 180405 Alarm
634 03 180406 Alarm
635 03 180407 Alarm
636 03 180408 Alarm
637 03 180409 Alarm
638 03 180410 Alarm
639 03 180411 Alarm
640 03 180412 Alarm
641 03 180413 Alarm
642 03 180414 Alarm
643 03 180415 Alarm
644 03 180416 Alarm
645 03 180417 Alarm
646 03 180418 Alarm
647 03 180419 Alarm
648 03 180420 Alarm
649 03 180421 Alarm
650 03 180422 Alarm

Page 9-76 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
651 03 180423 Alarm
652 03 180424 Alarm
653 03 180425 Alarm
654 03 180426 Alarm
655 03 180427 Alarm
656 03 180428 Alarm
657 03 180429 Alarm
658 03 180430 Alarm
659 03 180431 Alarm
660 03 180432 Alarm
661 03 180433 Alarm
662 03 180434 Alarm
663 03 180435 Alarm
664 03 180436 Alarm
665 03 180437 Alarm
666 03 180438 Alarm
667 03 180439 Alarm
668 03 180440 Alarm
669 03 180441 Alarm
670 03 180442 Alarm
671 03 180443 Alarm
672 03 180444 Alarm
673 03 180445 Alarm
674 03 180446 Alarm
675 03 180447 Alarm
676 03 180448 Alarm
677 03 180449 Alarm
678 03 180450 Alarm
679 03 181116 Alarm PCB vacuum error
680 03 181130 Alarm Fault of pressure balance.
681 03 181200 Alarm Cleaning paper empty
682 03 181201 Alarm Paste empty
683 03 181202 Alarm Print counter count up
684 03 181203 Alarm Board recog error
685 03 181204 Alarm Cleaning solvent empty
686 03 181205 Alarm PCB transport warning
687 03 181206 Alarm PCB extend error
688 03 181207 Alarm Self diagnosis error
689 03 181208 Alarm Data check error
690 03 181209 Alarm Front conveyor PCB In error (Printing)
691 03 181210 Alarm Rear conveyor PCB In error (Printing)
692 03 181211 Alarm Board holder interlock error
693 03 181237 Alarm Squeegee up timeout warning (F)
694 03 181238 Alarm Squeegee up timeout warning (R)
695 03 181430 Alarm Cleaning of Mask
696 03 181431 Alarm Remaining Mask warning
697 03 183101 Alarm Temperature error
698 03 183102 Alarm Paint recog trouble
699 03 183103 Alarm Lack of priming shot tape
700 03 183104 Alarm PCB trouble

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-77

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
701 03 183105 Alarm Illegal machine data
702 03 185001 Alarm Pickup height auto-measuring error
703 03 185002 Alarm Cushion end
704 03 185003 Alarm Tape float (FeederBay1)
705 03 185004 Alarm Tape float (FeederBay2)
706 03 185005 Alarm Table tray axis step out
707 03 185031 Alarm Mount position recognition error
708 03 185032 Alarm Recognition rate error
709 03 185033 Alarm Temperature compensation error
710 03 185034 Alarm NG conveyor full stop
711 03 185035 Alarm PMD overheat stop
712 03 185036 Alarm RS485 communication error
713 03 185037 Alarm Tape float detected
714 03 185038 Alarm Head fault
715 03 185039 Alarm Head not up
716 03 185040 Alarm Nozzle interlock
717 03 185041 Alarm Incorrect nozzle set
718 03 185042 Alarm Nozzle exchange fault
719 03 185043 Alarm Nozzle eccentric error
720 03 185044 Alarm Laser counter error
721 03 185045 Alarm Laser recognition error
722 03 185046 Alarm Pin counter error stop
723 03 185047 Alarm Pin pull-out
724 03 185048 Alarm Pin float error stop
725 03 185049 Alarm Tray empty warning
726 03 185050 Alarm Tray empty
727 03 185051 Alarm Pickup height auto-measuring error
728 03 185052 Alarm CPU box over heat
729 03 185053 Alarm Driver box 1 over heat
730 03 185054 Alarm Driver box 2 over heat
731 03 185056 Alarm Center conveyor trouble (Movable conveyor)
732 03 185057 Alarm Center conveyor trouble (Fixed conveyor)
733 03 185058 Alarm Tray pickup height measuring value error
734 03 185059 Alarm Vacuum pump 1 thermal error
735 03 185060 Alarm Vacuum pump 2 thermal error
736 03 185061 Alarm Vacuum pump 3 thermal error
737 03 185062 Alarm Power box over heat
738 03 185085 Alarm Area sensor detect (Operator-side front)
739 03 185086 Alarm Area sensor detect (Operator-side rear)
740 03 185087 Alarm Area sensor detect (Anti-operator-side front)
741 03 185088 Alarm Area sensor detect (Anti-operator-side rear)
742 03 185089 Alarm Chip eject conveyor full warning
743 03 185090 Alarm Chip eject conveyor full stop
744 03 185091 Alarm Mount position recognition error
745 03 185092 Alarm Tape float detected
746 03 185093 Alarm Incorrect nozzle set
747 03 185094 Alarm Nozzle exchange fault
748 03 185095 Alarm Nozzle eccentric error
749 03 185096 Alarm Nozzle stocker down error
750 03 185097 Alarm Nozzle stocker open error

Page 9-78 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
751 03 185098 Alarm Nozzle stocker up error
752 03 185099 Alarm Nozzle stocker close error
753 03 185100 Alarm Mount point out of area
754 03 185101 Alarm Recognition error (Nozzle center offset)
755 03 185102 Alarm Recognition error (Heat calibration)
756 03 185103 Alarm Camera marker returning error (Monitor camera)
757 03 185104 Alarm Lack of flux (syringe)
758 03 185105 Alarm Lack of flux (disk)
759 03 185106 Alarm Camera marker returning error (Area camera)
760 03 185107 Alarm Recognition error (machine parameter teach)
761 03 185109 Alarm Lead checker counter error
762 03 185110 Alarm Lead detection error
763 03 185111 Alarm Pin counter error stop
764 03 185112 Alarm Pin pull-out
765 03 185113 Alarm Pin float error stop
766 03 185114 Alarm Cover SW1 (Undefined)
767 03 185115 Alarm Cover SW2 (Undefined)
768 03 185116 Alarm Cover SW3 (Undefined)
769 03 185117 Alarm Flux unit cover open
770 03 185121 Alarm Manual tray exist error
771 03 185122 Alarm Manual tray not exist error
772 03 185123 Alarm Tray pick up posi recog error
773 03 185124 Alarm PCB gang transport error
774 03 185125 Alarm Manual tray setting error
775 03 185204 Alarm DT10F (#2) cover open
776 03 185224 Alarm DT10F (#3) cover open
777 03 185301 Alarm DT20F (#2) magazine exchange door open
778 03 185310 Alarm DT20F (#2) supply door open
779 03 185311 Alarm DT20F (#2) empty tray eject PAD pickup error
780 03 185312 Alarm DT20F (#2) empty tray eject box full
781 03 185314 Alarm DT20F (#2) tray height error
782 03 185316 Alarm DT20F (#2) Chip eject palette full warning
783 03 185317 Alarm DT20F (#2) Chip eject palette full
784 03 185318 Alarm DT30F (#2) Brake open error
785 03 185319 Alarm DT30F (#2) Unit over heat
786 03 185320 Alarm DT30F (#2) Emergency switch ON
787 03 185321 Alarm DT30F (#2) Servo switch OFF
788 03 185331 Alarm DT20F (#3) magazine exchange door open
789 03 185340 Alarm DT20F (#3) supply door open
790 03 185341 Alarm DT20F (#3) empty tray eject PAD pickup error
791 03 185342 Alarm DT20F (#3) empty tray eject box full
792 03 185344 Alarm DT20F (#3) tray height error
793 03 185346 Alarm DT20F (#3) Chip eject palette full warning
794 03 185347 Alarm DT20F (#3) Chip eject palette full
795 03 185401 Alarm Tape feed not at return position
796 03 185402 Alarm Z-axis origin offset abnormal
797 03 185403 Alarm X-axis overrun
798 03 185404 Alarm Y-axis overrun
799 03 185405 Alarm L-axis overrun
800 03 185406 Alarm Tray unit communication error

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-79

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
801 03 185407 Alarm Tray trouble
802 03 185408 Alarm Tray error data receive wait
803 03 185409 Alarm Exit port fault
804 03 185410 Alarm Pallet chuck fault
805 03 185411 Alarm Scattering plate cylinder not proceed
806 03 185412 Alarm Scattering plate cylinder not return
807 03 185413 Alarm Interference with scattering plate
808 03 185414 Alarm Cutter blade not at return position
809 03 185415 Alarm Stage not ready
810 03 185416 Alarm Sub stage not ready
811 03 185417 Alarm Feeder base set up not complete
812 03 185418 Alarm Z axis cylinder up error
813 03 185419 Alarm Chuck origin sensor off
814 03 185420 Alarm Laser interlock switch off
815 03 185421 Alarm Scattering plate position error
816 03 185422 Alarm Tray lifter overrun
817 03 185423 Alarm Tray X axis overrun
818 03 185424 Alarm Tray Y axis overrun
819 03 185425 Alarm Tray head up error
820 03 185426 Alarm Laser unit fault
821 03 185503 Alarm Y axis cooling fan fault
822 03 185551 Alarm Nozzle stocker down error
823 03 185552 Alarm Nozzle stocker open error
824 03 185553 Alarm Nozzle stocker up error
825 03 185554 Alarm Nozzle stocker close error
826 03 185555 Alarm Tape feeder interlock
827 03 185556 Alarm Tape feeder maintenance open interlock
828 03 185557 Alarm Tape feeder set trouble (feederbay1)
829 03 185558 Alarm Tape feeder set trouble (feederbay2)
830 03 185559 Alarm Mount point out of area
831 03 185560 Alarm Recognition error (Nozzle center offset)
832 03 185561 Alarm Recognition error (Heat calibration)
833 03 185562 Alarm Camera marker returning error
834 03 185563 Alarm Head camera setting error
835 03 185564 Alarm Line camera θ over tolerance
836 03 185565 Alarm Load cell trouble
837 03 185566 Alarm Lack of flux
838 03 185571 Alarm Calibration error
839 03 185572 Alarm Recognition error (machine parameter teach)
840 03 185573 Alarm Stroke end sensor trouble
841 03 185574 Alarm Area camera θ over tolerance
842 03 185575 Alarm Surface compensation data error
843 03 185576 Alarm Monitor camera θ over tolerance
844 03 185577 Alarm Head θ origin offset teach error
845 03 185578 Alarm Surface compensation over tolerance
846 03 185579 Alarm Carry weight control trouble
847 03 185580 Alarm Tray feeder shunt trouble
848 03 185581 Alarm Head B trouble (large parts mount impossible)
849 03 185591 Alarm Table tray Disconnection fiber line
850 03 185592 Alarm Table tray cover open

Page 9-80 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
851 03 185593 Alarm Tray feeder interference
852 03 185594 Alarm Table tray pallet interlock
853 03 185595 Alarm Table tray height error
854 03 185601 Alarm Mag tray magazine exchange door open
855 03 185602 Alarm Mag tray pickup side shutter open error
856 03 185603 Alarm Mag tray pickup side shutter close error
857 03 185604 Alarm Mag tray pickup side pallet empty error
858 03 185605 Alarm Mag tray pickup side pallet exist error
859 03 185606 Alarm Mag tray supply side shutter open error
860 03 185607 Alarm Mag tray supply side shutter close error
861 03 185608 Alarm Mag tray supply side pallet empty error
862 03 185609 Alarm Mag tray supply side pallet exist error
863 03 185610 Alarm Mag tray supply door open
864 03 185611 Alarm Mag tray empty tray pickup stop
865 03 185612 Alarm Mag tray empty tray eject box full
866 03 185613 Alarm Mag tray empty tray eject pad up error
867 03 185614 Alarm Mag tray tray height error
868 03 187100 Alarm Wait for chip recognition
869 03 187101 Alarm Wait for chip recognition
870 03 187102 Alarm Bad head (nozzle) detected
871 03 187201 Alarm Height sensor dust err
872 03 187202 Alarm Height calculation partial
873 03 187203 Alarm Recognition timeout error
874 03 187204 Alarm Bad nozzle rate over
875 03 187205 Alarm Tape feeder miss rate over
876 03 187206 Alarm Rear center safety cover open
877 03 187207 Alarm A stage safety cover open
878 03 187208 Alarm B stage safety cover open
879 03 187209 Alarm Nozzle height error
880 03 187210 Alarm Height sensor voltage error
881 03 187212 Alarm Astage tape float error
882 03 187213 Alarm Bstage tape float error
883 03 187401 Emergency transaction Cam interrupt fault
884 03 187402 Emergency transaction Head number mismatch
885 03 187403 Emergency transaction Front Cover open
886 03 187404 Emergency transaction Rear Cover open
887 03 187406 Emergency transaction A stage safety cover open
888 03 187407 Emergency transaction B stage safety cover open
889 03 187408 Emergency transaction Board holder up error
890 03 187409 Emergency transaction Board holder down error
891 03 187410 Emergency transaction AdhesiveTape feed interlock
892 03 187411 Emergency transaction Tape feed interlock
893 03 187412 Emergency transaction Pickup nozzle interlock
894 03 187413 Emergency transaction Mount nozzle interlock
895 03 187414 Emergency transaction Width adjust start check err
896 03 187415 Emergency transaction Thermal trip (Blower)
897 03 187416 Emergency transaction Thermal trip (Vacuum tank)
898 03 187417 Emergency transaction X-axis motion partial
899 03 187418 Emergency transaction Y-axis motion partial
900 03 187419 Emergency transaction A stage-axis motion partial

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-81

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
901 03 187420 Emergency transaction B stage-axis motion partial
902 03 187421 Emergency transaction Pickup height motor error
903 03 187422 Emergency transaction Chip send select partial
904 03 187423 Emergency transaction Table Z-axis motor error
905 03 187424 Emergency transaction C conveyor motor driver err
906 03 187425 Emergency transaction Pick Z-axis motor driver err
907 03 187426 Emergency transaction L width adjust motor driver error
908 03 187427 Emergency transaction R width adjust motor driver error
909 03 187428 Emergency transaction Camera X-axis motor driver error
910 03 187429 Emergency transaction Camera Y-axis motor driver error
911 03 187430 Emergency transaction Pickup height motor driver error
912 03 187431 Emergency transaction Table Z-axis motor driver error
913 03 187432 Overrun Camera X-axis (−) overrun
914 03 187433 Overrun Camera X-axis (+) overrun
915 03 187434 Overrun Camera Y-axis (−) overrun
916 03 187435 Overrun Camera Y-axis (+) overrun
917 03 187436 Overrun Table Z-axis (−) overrun
918 03 187437 Overrun Table Z-axis (+) overrun
919 03 188801 Alarm Emergency switch ON
920 03 188802 Alarm Servo Switch OFF
921 03 188803 Alarm Air pressure drop
922 03 188804 Alarm Front Cover open
923 03 188805 Alarm Rear Cover open
924 03 188806 Alarm A stage safety cover open
925 03 188807 Alarm B stage safety cover open
926 03 188808 Alarm Rear center safety cover open
927 03 188809 Alarm A stage tape feeder lifting (Front)
928 03 188810 Alarm A stage tape feeder lifting (Rear)
929 03 188811 Alarm B stage tape feeder lifting (Front)
930 03 188812 Alarm B stage tape feeder lifting (Rear)
931 03 188813 Alarm Tape feeder setting error
932 03 188814 Alarm Production end signal detected
933 03 188815 Alarm Pick Z-axis motor driver err
934 03 188816 Alarm Camera X-axis motor driver error
935 03 188817 Alarm Camera Y-axis motor driver error
936 03 188818 Alarm L width adjust motor driver error
937 03 188819 Alarm C conveyor motor driver err
938 03 188820 Alarm Emergency switch ONMain speed limit over
939 03 188821 Alarm Tape feed ROD descend
940 03 188822 Alarm Adhesive tape feed ROD descend
941 03 188823 Alarm Stage interference
942 03 188824 Alarm Pickup pos head descend
943 03 188825 Alarm Mount pos head descend
944 03 188826 Alarm Bad nozzle rate over
945 03 188827 Alarm Blower over heat
946 03 188828 Alarm Vacuum pump over heat
947 03 188829 Alarm Power box over heat
948 03 188830 Alarm CPU box over heat
949 03 188831 Alarm Stage position detection sensor error
950 03 188832 Alarm Chip recog LED reflect light error (short circuit)

Page 9-82 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
951 03 188833 Alarm Chip recog LED reflect light error (over current)
952 03 188834 Alarm Chip recog LED reflect light error (open)
953 03 188835 Alarm Chip recog LED reflect light error (temperature error)
954 03 188836 Alarm Chip recog LED reflect light error (set volt check NG)
955 03 188837 Alarm Chip recog LED reflect light error (set current check NG)
956 03 188838 Alarm Chip recog LED reflect light error (LED emitting error)
957 03 188839 Alarm Chip recog LED reflect light error (serial network error)
958 03 188840 Alarm Chip recog LED pass light error (short circuit)
959 03 188841 Alarm Chip recog LED pass light error (over current)
960 03 188842 Alarm Chip recog LED pass light error (open)
961 03 188843 Alarm Chip recog LED pass light error (temperature error)
962 03 188844 Alarm Chip recog LED pass light error (set volt check NG)
963 03 188845 Alarm Chip recog LED pass light error (set current check NG)
964 03 188846 Alarm Chip recog LED pass light error (LED emitting error)
965 03 188847 Alarm Chip recog LED pass light error (serial network error)
966 03 188848 Alarm Board recog LED coaxial light error (short circuit)
967 03 188849 Alarm Board recog LED coaxial light error (over current)
968 03 188850 Alarm Board recog LED coaxial light error (open)
969 03 188851 Alarm Board recog LED coaxial light error (temperature error)
970 03 188852 Alarm Board recog LED coaxial light error (set volt check NG)
971 03 188853 Alarm Board recog LED coaxial light error (set current check NG)
972 03 188854 Alarm Board recog LED coaxial light error (LED emoting error)
973 03 188855 Alarm Board recog LED coaxial light error (serial network error)
974 03 188856 Alarm Board recog LED side light error (short circuit)
975 03 188857 Alarm Board recog LED side light error (over current)
976 03 188858 Alarm Board recog LED side light error (open)
977 03 188859 Alarm Board recog LED side light error (temperature error)
978 03 188860 Alarm Board recog LED side light error (set volt check NG)
979 03 188861 Alarm Board recog LED side light error (set current check NG)
980 03 188862 Alarm Board recog LED side light error (LED emoting error)
981 03 188863 Alarm Board recog LED side light error (serial network error)
982 03 188864 Alarm A stage feeder error set check
983 03 188865 Alarm B stage feeder error set check
984 03 188866 Alarm Safety relay (front^center^rear cover SW) wrong circuit
985 03 188867 Alarm Safety relay (emergency stop) wrong circuit
986 03 188868 Alarm Safety relay (AST cover SW) wrong circuit
987 03 188869 Alarm Safety relay (BST cover SW) wrong circuit
988 03 188901 Alarm Stage exchange (A→B)
989 03 188902 Alarm Stage exchange (B→A)
990 03 188993 Alarm Chip eject miss

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-83

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
991 03 189051 Alarm Parts empty stop (Main side)
992 03 189052 Alarm Parts empty stop (Sub side)
993 03 189056 Alarm Chip recog error stop (Main side)
994 03 189057 Alarm Chip recog error stop (Sub side)
995 03 189058 Alarm Recognition timeout error (Main side)
996 03 189059 Alarm Recognition timeout error (Sub side)
997 03 189060 Alarm Recog communication error (Main side)
998 03 189061 Alarm Recog communication error (Sub side)
999 03 189062 Alarm PCB recognition error (Main side)
1000 03 189063 Alarm PCB recognition error (Sub side)
1001 03 189064 Alarm Mount position recognition error (Main side)
1002 03 189065 Alarm Mount position recognition error (Sub side)
1003 03 189066 Alarm Temperature compensation error (Main side)
1004 03 189067 Alarm Temperature compensation error (Sub side)
1005 03 189068 Alarm Nozzle check error (Front side)
1006 03 189069 Alarm Nozzle check error (Rear side)
1007 03 190000 Production configuration Start at Production configuration
1008 03 190001 Production configuration Exit Production configuration
1009 03 200000 MC adjustment Start at MC adjustment
1010 03 200001 MC adjustment Exit MC adjustment
1011 03 210000 Serviceman mode menu Start at Serviceman mode menu
1012 03 210001 Serviceman mode menu Exit Serviceman mode menu
1013 03 220000 Product data teach Start at Product data teach
1014 03 220001 Product data teach Exit Product data teach
1015 03 230000 Machine parameter teach Start at Machine parameter teach
1016 03 230001 Machine parameter teach Exit Machine parameter teach
1017 03 300000 Axis error [%s11-6], [%s1-10]
1018 03 300000 Axis error [%s11-6], [%s1-10]
1019 03 300000 Axis error [%s11-6], [%s1-10]
1020 03 300000 Axis error [%s11-6], [%s1-10]
1021 03 300000 Axis error [%s11-6], [%s1-10]
1022 03 300000 Axis error [%s11-6], [%s1-10]
1023 03 300000 Axis error [%s11-6], [%s1-10]
1024 03 300000 Axis error [%s11-6], [%s1-10]
1025 03 300000 Axis error [%s11-6], [%s1-10]
1026 03 300000 Axis error [%s11-6], [%s1-10]
1027 03 300000 Axis error Stage No [%d0-2],[%s2-2],[%s4-4]
1028 03 300000 Axis error Stage No [%d0-2],[%s2-2],[%s4-4]
1029 03 310000 Pickup error Pickup error occurred
1030 03 310000 Pickup error Pickup error occurred

Page 9-84 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
1031 03 310000 Pickup error Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1032 03 310000 Pickup error Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1033 03 310000 Pickup error Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1034 03 310000 Pickup error [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1035 03 310000 Pickup error [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1036 03 310000 Pickup error [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
Stage No[%d0-2], Head No[%d2-2], Nozzle Position[%d4-2],
1037 03 310000 Pickup error Nozzle No[%d6-5], Feeder Address[%d11-7],
Parts Position[%d18-2], Chip ID[%d28-6]
Stage No[%d0-2], Head No[%d2-2], Nozzle Position[%d4-2],
1038 03 310000 Pickup error Nozzle No[%d6-5], Feeder Address[%d11-7],
Parts Position[%d18-2], Chip ID[%d28-6]
1039 03 320000 Recog error Recog error occurred
1040 03 320000 Recog error Recog error occurred
1041 03 320000 Recog error Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1042 03 320000 Recog error Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1043 03 320000 Recog error Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1044 03 320000 Recog error [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1045 03 320000 Recog error [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1046 03 320000 Recog error [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
Stage No[%d0-2] ,Head No[%d2-2], Nozzle Position[%d4-2],
1047 03 320000 Recog error Nozzle No[%d6-5], Feeder Address[%d11-7],
Parts Position[%d18-2], Chip ID[%d28-6]
Stage No[%d0-2], Head No[%d2-2], Nozzle Position[%d4-2],
1048 03 320000 Recog error Nozzle No[%d6-5], Feeder Address[%d11-7],
Parts Position[%d18-2], Chip ID[%d28-6]
1049 03 330000 Height error Height error occurred
1050 03 330000 Height error Height error occurred
1051 03 330000 Height error Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1052 03 330000 Height error Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1053 03 330000 Height error Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1054 03 330000 Height error [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1055 03 330000 Height error [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1056 03 330000 Height error [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1057 03 340000 MountMiss Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1058 03 340000 MountMiss Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1059 03 340000 MountMiss Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1060 03 340000 MountMiss [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-85

9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
1061 03 340000 MountMiss [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1062 03 340000 MountMiss [%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1063 03 350000 Canceled Parts empty Exit Parts empty
1064 03 350000 Canceled Parts empty Exit Parts empty
1065 03 350000 Parts empty Lack of work[%s13-4], Stage No[%s9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1066 03 350000 Parts empty Lack of work[%s13-4], Stage No[%s9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1067 03 350000 Parts empty Lack of work[%s13-4], Stage No[%s9-4], Unit No[%d1-8]
1068 03 350000 Parts empty Lack of work[%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1069 03 350000 Parts empty Lack of work[%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1070 03 350000 Parts empty Lack of work[%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1071 03 350000 Parts empty Lack of work[%s13-4], Unit No[%d1-12]
1072 03 350000 Parts empty Lack of work[%s13-4], [%s0-12]
1073 03 350000 Parts empty Lack of work[%s13-4], [%s0-12]
1074 03 350000 Parts empty Lack of work[%s13-4], Head No[%s1-12]
Stage No[%d0-2], Head No[%d2-2], Nozzle Position[%d4-2],
Nozzle No[%d6-5], Feeder Address[%d11-7],
1075 03 350000 Parts empty
Parts Position[%d18-2], Chip ID[%d28-6],
Lack of work[%h34-6]
Stage No[%d0-2], Head No[%d2-2], Nozzle Position[%d4-2],
Nozzle No[%d6-5], Feeder Address[%d11-7],
1076 03 350000 Parts empty
Parts Position[%d18-2], Chip ID[%d28-6],
Lack of work[%h34-6]
1077 03 351000 Warning Parts empty Start at Warning Parts empty
1078 03 351000 Warning Parts empty Start at Warning Parts empty
1079 03 35F000 Occurred Parts empty Start at Parts empty
1080 03 35F000 Occurred Parts empty Start at Parts empty
1081 03 360000 Cam error Before Cam No[%d9-8], Present cam No[%d1-8]
1082 03 360000 Cam error Before Cam No[%d9-8], Present cam No[%d1-8]
1083 03 360000 Cam error Before Cam No[%d9-8], Present cam No[%d1-8]
1084 03 370000 Head number mismatch Hard Head No[%d9-8], Soft Head No[%d1-8]
1085 03 370000 Head number mismatch Hard Head No[%d9-8], Soft Head No[%d1-8]
1086 03 370000 Head number mismatch Hard Head No[%d9-8], Soft Head No[%d1-8]
1087 03 380000 Bad head/nozzle detect Bad head/nozzle detect occurred
1088 03 380000 Bad head/nozzle detect Bad head/nozzle detect occurred
Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4],
1089 03 380000 Bad head/nozzle detect
Bad Head/Nozzle[%s5-4]
Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4],
1090 03 380000 Bad head/nozzle detect
Bad Head/Nozzle[%s5-4]
Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4],
1091 03 380000 Bad head/nozzle detect
Bad Head/Nozzle[%s5-4]
Stage No[%d0-2], Head No[%d2-2],
1092 03 380000 Bad head/nozzle detect
Bad head/nozzle detect[%h34-6]
Stage No[%d0-2], Head No[%d2-2], Nozzle Position[%d4-2],
1093 03 380000 Bad head/nozzle detect
Nozzle No[%d6-5], Bad head/nozzle detect[%h34-6]

Page 9-86 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.4 Event List

Main Event Sub Event

No. Main Event Sub Event
Code Code
Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4],
1094 03 390000 Ratio of bad nozzle error
Ratio of bad nozzle error[%s5-4]
1095 03 390000 Ratio of bad nozzle error Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4]
Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4],
1096 03 390000 Ratio of bad nozzle error
Ratio of bad nozzle error[%s5-4]
Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4],
1097 03 390000 Ratio of bad nozzle error
Ratio of bad nozzle error[%s5-4]
Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4],
1098 03 390000 Ratio of bad nozzle error
Ratio of bad nozzle error[%s5-4]
Head No[%d13-4], Nozzle No[%d9-4],
1099 03 390000 Ratio of bad nozzle error
Ratio of bad nozzle error[%s5-4]
Stage No[%d0-2], Head No[%d2-2], Nozzle Position[%d4-2],
1100 03 390000 Ratio of bad nozzle error
Nozzle No[%d6-5], Ratio of bad nozzle error[%h34-6]
Stage No[%d0-2], Head No[%d2-2], Nozzle Position[%d4-2],
1101 03 390000 Ratio of bad nozzle error
Nozzle No[%d6-5], Ratio of bad nozzle error[%h34-6]
1102 03 3A0000 Ratio of tapefeeder miss error Unit No[%d1-8]
1103 03 3A0000 Ratio of tapefeeder miss error Unit No[%d1-8]
1104 03 3A0000 Ratio of tapefeeder miss error Unit No[%d1-8]
Stage No[%d0-2], Head No[%d2-2],
1105 03 3A0000 Ratio of tapefeeder miss error
Feeder Address[%d11-7], Parts Position[%d18-2]
Stage No[%d0-2], Head No[%d2-2],
1106 03 3A0000 Ratio of tapefeeder miss error
Feeder Address[%d11-7], Parts Position[%d18-2]
1107 03 3B0000 Head θ Axis error Head No[%d13-4], [%s9-4], [%s1-8]
1108 03 3B0000 Head θ Axis error Head No[%d13-4], [%s9-4], [%s1-8]
1109 03 3B0000 Head θ Axis error Head No[%d13-4], [%s9-4], [%s1-8]
1110 03 3D0000 Nozzle height error Head No[%d13-4]
1111 03 3D0000 Nozzle height error Head No[%d13-4]
1112 03 3D0000 Nozzle height error Head No[%d13-4]
1113 03 3E0000 Height sensor voltage error Measure value[%d7-10]
1114 03 3E0000 Height sensor voltage error Measure value[%d7-10]
1115 03 3E0000 Height sensor voltage error Measure value[%d7-10]
1116 03 3F0000 Wire ring Communication error Stage No[%d0-2], Board No.[%d2-2], [%s4-4]
1117 03 3F0000 Wire ring Communication error Stage No[%d0-2], Board No.[%d2-2], [%s4-4]
1118 03 400000 Feeder set miss Unit No[%d1-8]
1119 03 400000 Feeder set miss Unit No[%d1-8]
1120 03 400000 Feeder set miss Unit No[%d1-8]
1121 03 400000 Feeder set miss Unit No[%d1-8]
1122 03 400000 Feeder set miss Unit No[%d1-8]
1123 03 400000 Feeder set miss Unit No[%d1-8]
1124 04 000000 Product 1board end Product 1board end
1125 05 000000 Production end Production end (Production end signal detect)
1126 06 000000 Board inlet Board inlet
1127 07 000000 Board outlet Board outlet
1128 08 000000 Product 1board start Product 1board start
1129 10 000000 MC data change MC data change (change in editor)
1130 11 000000 Function Switches change Function Switches change (change in editor)
1131 12 000000 MC parameter change MC parameter change (change in editor)
1132 13 000000 Recog data change Recog picture (PRU) data change (change by teach)
1133 14 000000 Production data clear Production data clear
1134 15 000000 Date change Date change
1135 16 000000 MC data select MC data select (select by file operation)
1136 17 000000 Alarm MC data delete (delete by file operation)

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-87

9.5 FAQ

9.5 FAQ
Describes the frequently asked questions about the outline and operation of ProViewer.

1. What is an ASCII file?

It is a file generated by the ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) which
was formatted by the ANCI (American National Standards Institute).
( 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications)

2. What are ASCII format specifications?

ProViewer applies files that are generated by the ASCII code as per described in the FAQ 1.
The ASCII format is the default storage rules on the specifics of each file.
( 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications)

3. Data-output folder name has Machine “Number;” what does this “Number” mean?
This number represents M in H.L.M. in the line configuration file.
H, L, and M stand for Host, Line, and Machine respectively; and one number is assigned to each
of the alphabets.
H is a PT’s number, L is a line number, and M represents a serial number assigned to each
machine that is signed on the line.

4. What are the differences between the two types of events (PT events and
machines event)?
PT events happen due to particularities of PT, such as its operation.
Machine events happen due to particularities of the machine, such as the operation and the
performance of the machine signed up to PT on the network line.

5. What happens when the disk becomes full?

When a hard disk becomes full because of the data output, ProViewer controls its state and
automatically deletes the files in chronological order.

6. How do the client package and the server package differ?

The client package has functions to reuse and edit data by generating it as an ASCII file.
The server package has functions to share data and develop it to a database.
These functions are provided for the users who tailor a system to match their specific purposes
and operate it.

7. What can be done on the network of ProViewer?

The network enables the interactive data transmissions among signed-up computers and the
hard disk compatibility on the network.

8. What is the description of the data opening and sharing of ProViewer?

Data opening means conversion of the data format to the ASCII so that the free processing
becomes executable.
Data sharing means to make the editorial jobs executable on the network described at FAQ 7.

Page 9-88 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

 9.5 FAQ

9. What is the lot track record file?

This file lets you know the track record of the past production lots.
( 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications)

10. What is a lot?

A lot is a batch of associated items that are produced under the same conditions.
A batch of produced items differs among machines, and is defined as those produced in a
specific segment.
( 9.2.7 Lot Definition)

11. How do I find the starting time and the ending time of a lot?
You can track down the times in the lot achievement file.
The lot achievement file has [Start] and [End] sections.
[Start] section retains data on when the lot production started.
[End] section retains data on when the lot production ended.
( 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications)

12. What is a line configuration file?

It is a file containing the information of the current line configuration.
You can verify the line configuration by this file.
( 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications)

13. What is a PT event file?

It is a file that contains information on PT events.
This file detects information on the events occurred in the PT.
( 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications)

14. What is a machine event file?

It is a file that contains information on machine events.
This file detects information on the events occurred in the machine.
( 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications)

15. What is a machine data information file?

This is a feeder/nozzle, board data, coordinate data, chip data related information file.
From this file, the component information/feeder information/nozzle information/mask recognition
information/board information for each lot can be inspected.
( 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications)

16. What is a production control information file?

It is a file that contains production control information for each board production.
This file detects information on troubles and errors occurred in the machine.
( 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications)

17. What is a production control information initial value file?

This is the initial-value file for the calculation of an accurate value of each lot.
This file computes data from the start to the end of a lot production.
( 9.3 ASCII Format Specifications)

9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00 Page 9-89

9.5 FAQ

18. What is the number of consecutive days of data retention on the ProViewer setting
window?
ProViewer is designed to automatically delete the created data. (Because the hard disk capacity
has an upper limit) With this function, a number of consecutive days the data is retained in the
PT can be specified.

19. What is a deletion time on the ProViewer setting window?

This is a function to specify a time to delete the data beyond the days of data retention described
in FAQ 18.

20. What is a lot type on the ProViewer setting window?

ProViewer allots five types as lot definition.
( 9.2.6 Lot Kind)

21. How do I compile data of the production control information by machine?

Use production control information file, production control information initial value file, and lot
track record file.
The production control information file is generated when each board production finishes.
Also this file is to cumulate the information.
Therefore, to use the production control information file for two board productions:
Example) 19990701010101.pro and 19990701235959.pro
To seek data of the time slot from 1999/07/01 01:01:01 to 1999/07/01 23:59:59, subtract data of
19990701010101.pro file from that of 19990701235959.pro file so that the data in this segment
of production is obtained.
In the event that the production control information is cleared out within the time slot from
1999/07/01 01:01:01 to 1999/07/01 23:59:59, a production control information initial value file
exists.
The exact figures can be calculated by the use of this file.
If the lot compiles the data, the lot track record file can be utilized to calculate the data from the
starting point to the ending point of the lot.

22. Is it possible to monitor the machine performance?

Yes, ProViewer generates real-time information of machine events as an ASCII file.
As it reads in the generated information, it can supervise the now-active machine status.

23. Is it possible to get the trouble or warning signs notified on an automatic basis?
Yes, as explained in FAQ 22, a tool that automatically notifies incidents including troubles and
warning signs of the machine can be constructed by the use of applications such as Excel.

24. Is the erroneous information control feasible?

Yes, erroneous information can be retrieved from the production control information file and the
data can be calculated.

Page 9-90 9Q4C-E-PMD09-A03-00

10.

10. INSTALLATION

In PT, upgrading the current system version is referred to as installation, and installing
the new PT system is referred to as setup.
This chapter describes the installation, or upgrading the version of the PT system.

NOTICE
• The target computer shall have the PT system.
• The data created by each user will not be changed.
• When the PT shell (menu screen) has been customized, it will be back to the
default setting.
• Users shall not carry out setup (newly installation). To carry out setup, you need to
install “Apach” before installing PT. And only the serviceman can change such as
the line setup after setup.

9Q4C-E-PMD10-A00-00 Page 10-1

10.1 Installation Procedure
10.

10.1 Installation Procedure

NOTICE
“installpt” is a special instruction used to start the installer.
Except when executing installation, do not use “installpt.”

1. Click [End].

733C-EPt-Sh-005

2. Choose “Restart System (R)” and click

[Yes].

∗ When executing installation, you must exit all

the applications of the PT system. This step
will exit all the applications running currently.

733C-EPt-Sh-020

3. When the system is restarted, Press

[Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Delete].

• The logon window for Windows NT opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-003

4. Type “installpt” in both “User name” and

“Password” fields, and click [OK].

• <Installer> window opens.

9Q4C-EPt-Sh-011

To the next page

Page 10-2 9Q4C-E-PMD10-A01-00

 10.1 Installation Procedure

5. Click [Start to install].

• The installer launches and installation starts.

∗ If this window opens by mistake, click [Close].

The Windows NT logon window reopens.

∗ To change the installer, click [Set] to choose

9Q4C-EPt-Is-001
the installer.

• During installation, the window on the left

opens.

• Installation will take a little while.

9Q4C-EPt-Is-002

6. Tick off the “It ReBoot” radio box and

click [End].

• The installation is complete and the computer

will be restarted.

9Q4C-EPt-Is-003

9Q4C-E-PMD10-A01-00 Page 10-3

10.1 Installation Procedure
= MEMO =

= MEMO =

Page 10-4 9Q4C-E-PMD10-A01-00

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(PT TOOLS)
CONTENTS
TITLE PAGE • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. PT200 OUTLINE
2. FILER
3. VARIOUS INFORMATION DISPLAY
4. PARTS LIBRARY
5. VIRTUAL LINE
6. HELP
7. MAINTENANCE
8. USER MANAGEMENT
9. PROVIEWER
10. INSTALLATION
INDEX
 Delete time .............................................................. 9-10
INDEX Deleting a file .......................................................... 2-23
Deleting a group...................................................... 2-23
Deleting a lot ........................................................... 2-23
A Deleting a PT file..................................................... 2-23
Deleting the users ..................................................... 8-6
Ability of PT200 ......................................................... 1-2
Details by lot type...................................................... 9-8
About installer ........................................................... 7-3
Details display ........................................................... 2-6
About nozzle changer data ..................................... 2-34
Differences in the display area.................................. 5-8
About PT shell........................................................... 1-7
Differences in the menu bar...................................... 5-8
About the tools used simultaneously ........................ 1-7
Directory hierarchy.................................................. 9-14
Adding the users ....................................................... 8-5
Directory-selecting window ....................................... 9-6
All data display .......................................................... 4-4
Display field adjustment ............................................ 2-6
Area selecting procedure ........................................ 4-35
Display item setting............................................ 2-8, 4-4
Arranging monitor always/not always front ............... 3-3
Download ................................................................ 2-26
ASCII file output ........................................................ 9-5
DrawingSpeed......................................................... 4-34
ASCII format specifications ..................................... 9-12
E
B
Editing from parts name to notes ............................ 4-16
Ball area select/arrangement display field .............. 4-26
Editing the BGA extended data............................... 4-25
Ball arrangement setting ......................................... 4-27
Editing the chip information..................................... 4-20
Ball count per column, ball count per row............... 4-25
Editing the feeder information ................................. 4-17
Ball pitch.................................................................. 4-26
Editing the machine data ........................................ 4-29
Basic operations of mouse and keyboard............... 1-11
Editing the QFP extended data............................... 4-22
Before starting the user managers............................ 8-2
Editing the tray data ................................................ 4-34
Eject height ............................................................. 4-32
C Event display area ............................................. 2-5, 3-6
Event list.................................................................. 9-55
Changing a PT file name......................................... 2-21
Event viewer.............................................................. 3-5
Changing display types ......................................3-3, 3-7
Exit .......................................................................... 1-10
Chip ......................................................................... 4-21
Exit after saving....................................................... 4-37
Chip area select/arrangement display field............. 4-35
Exit and save........................................................... 4-37
Chip count .............................................4-20, 4-34, 4-35
Exit without saving .................................................. 4-37
Chip dimensions...................................................... 4-30
Export...................................................................... 2-42
Chip information edit area ....................................... 4-13
Extended data kind ................................................. 4-21
Chip kind ................................................................. 4-20
Extending No........................................................... 4-16
Chip name............................................................... 4-20
Chip recognition information ..................................... 6-4
Clear balls from selected range .............................. 4-27 F
Clear Missing Balls.................................................. 4-27
FAQ ......................................................................... 9-88
Clear Parts Missing ................................................. 4-36
Favorites organizing.................................................. 4-9
CM20X/301 system installer ..................................... 7-3
Feeder information edit area................................... 4-13
Comment................................................................. 4-16
Feeder kind ............................................................. 4-17
Commercial parts input area ................................... 4-13
Feeder Width........................................................... 4-19
Common operations................................................ 1-11
FeederSpeed .......................................................... 4-30
Common record specifications................................ 9-15
File information area ................................................. 2-5
Conditions for importing/exporting .......................... 2-40
File operations ........................................................ 2-17
Configuration window.........................................9-3, 9-4
File output ............................................................... 9-14
Conversion procedure............................................... 7-5
Filer ........................................................................... 2-1
Converting the external data, such as CAD data...... 1-3
Filer display functions ............................................... 2-6
Copying a file in PT ................................................. 2-17
FirstPickUpPoint ..................................................... 4-34
Creating a group folder ........................................... 2-14
Folder information area............................................. 2-4
Creating a lot........................................................... 2-15
Functions of ProViewer ............................................. 9-2
Creating a new PT file............................................. 2-13
Function-selecting operations ................................. 1-11
Creating a revision .................................................. 2-31
Creating the virtual data .......................................... 5-11
Creating various kinds of production data................. 1-2 G
Generation management ........................................ 9-10
D Group display setting ................................................ 2-7
Data hold days .......................................................... 9-7

9Q4C-E-PMD0Z-A01-00 Page 1
H Management .............................................................5-6
Menu bar .................................. 2-3, 3-5, 3-11, 4-2, 4-13
Help ...........................................................................6-1 MntSpeed ................................................................4-33
How to use favorites..................................................4-8 Monitoring the line (machines) ..................................1-2
How to use the parts library.......................................4-2 Mount gap ...............................................................4-33
HTML help .................................................................6-4 Mount Holding .........................................................4-30
HTML help screen .....................................................6-4 Mounting load..........................................................4-23

I N
IC type for laser recognition ....................................4-23 Nozzle kind..............................................................4-31
Import ......................................................................2-40 NT user manager ......................................................8-3
Importing data of old machines (PT-nonsupport models) ...2-44 Number of reel.........................................................4-17
Importing/Exporting data .........................................2-40
Input area for from the parts name to the notes......4-13 O
Input operations in edit ............................................1-12
Inputting the commercial parts data ........................4-28 Only the latest-version file display...........................2-12
Installation ...............................................................10-1 Other production information reference ..................3-12
Installation procedure .......................................7-3, 10-2 Other settings ..........................................................4-33
Outline of file specifications.....................................9-12
L Outline of filer ............................................................2-2
Outline of version display ..........................................6-2
Lamp setting ............................................................4-32
Laser scanning ........................................................4-23 P
LastPickUpPoint ......................................................4-34
Lead float check ......................................................4-23 Part name................................................................4-16
Lead float check information ...................................4-23 Parts edit window ....................................................4-12
Lead float Max .........................................................4-23 Parts library ...............................................................4-1
LifterSpeed ..............................................................4-34 Parts library display area...........................................4-3
Limiting condition for nozzle changing ....................2-38 Parts library edit windows........................................4-12
Line...................................................................4-16, 5-6 Parts library entry/edit .............................................4-10
Line configuration file ..............................................9-16 Parts library list window.............................................4-2
Line monitor...............................................................3-2 Parts library registering procedures ........................4-10
Line switching ............................................................5-9 Pattern Edit..............................................................4-35
Load.........................................................................4-26 Pickup gap...............................................................4-33
Loading the standard chip data ......................4-13, 4-14 Pickup Holding ........................................................4-30
Log setting .................................................................3-8 PickUp Position .......................................................4-32
Logon.........................................................................1-8 PickUpPoint/Chip count ..........................................4-34
Lot achievement file ................................................9-19 Pin information ........................................................4-24
Lot copy ...................................................................2-19 Pin pitch...................................................................4-24
Lot data list display....................................................2-9 Position setting ........................................................4-32
Lot definition ..............................................................9-8 Print button ................................................................6-3
Lot kind ......................................................................9-7 Production control information display area ............ 3-11
Production control information file...........................9-24
M Production control information file setting ........3-9, 3-12
Production control information initial value file ........9-42
Machine data edit area............................................4-13 Production information viewer.................................3-10
Machine data information file ..................................9-43 ProViewer ..................................................................9-1
Machine edit window ...............................................4-12 PT event file ............................................................9-21
Machine event file ...................................................9-23 PT event list.............................................................9-55
Machine event list....................................................9-64 PT event screen ........................................................3-6
Machine event screen ...............................................3-6 PT file copy..............................................................2-17
Machine information setting selection .......................5-6 PT user manager.......................................................8-4
Machine selection window.........................................5-6 PT200 conversion tool...............................................7-4
Machine settings display .........................................5-10 PT200 outline ............................................................1-1
Machines that ProViewer supports............................9-2 PT200 system configuration......................................1-6
Main screen of event viewer .....................................3-5 PT200-support models ..............................................1-5
Main screen of filer ....................................................2-2 PT-shell screen..........................................................1-7
Main screen of production information viewer ........ 3-11 PUpSpeed ...............................................................4-33
Main screen of PT user manager ..............................8-4
Maintenance ..............................................................7-1
Maker name, item code, bar code...........................4-28

Page 2 9Q4C-E-PMD0Z-A01-00
R T
Read standard chip ................................................. 4-30 Tape kind................................................................. 4-19
Recog. Speed.......................................................... 4-30 Target machine information..................................... 3-11
Record specifications by file ................................... 9-16 Timing of generation and deletion, and naming criteria... 9-13
Reel size ................................................................. 4-19 Title bar display/hide ................................................. 3-3
REF ................................................................4-21, 4-30 Tool area ................................................................... 4-3
Registering procedure............................................... 4-8 Tool bar ............................................. 2-4, 3-6, 4-3, 4-13
Registering to list for machine................................. 2-24 Transferring data between PT and machines ......... 2-26
Revision deletion..................................................... 2-33 Transferring data by communication....................... 2-26
Transferring data via FD ......................................... 2-28
S Tray ......................................................................... 4-34
Tray registration ...................................................... 4-33
Screen of nozzle changer data sharing .................. 2-34 TrayOuterSize ......................................................... 4-34
Screen of version display.......................................... 6-2
Search display......................................................... 2-10 U
Search for chip name ................................................ 4-6
Search for chip type .................................................. 4-6 Unlock ....................................................................... 7-2
Search for parts name............................................... 4-5 Unlock procedure ...................................................... 7-2
Search type ............................................................... 4-5 Upload..................................................................... 2-27
Selected ball position .............................................. 4-25 User management .................................................... 8-1
Selecting from favorites ............................................ 4-8 Using the search function ......................................... 4-5
Selecting from histories............................................. 4-7
Selecting from list...................................................... 4-7 V
Sending pitch .......................................................... 4-19
Set balls to selected range...................................... 4-27 Vacuum sensor check ............................................. 4-32
Set Parts No in selected range ............................... 4-36 Various information display ....................................... 3-1
Set Parts Yes in selected range .............................. 4-36 Version display area.................................................. 6-3
Setting the NT user manager .................................... 8-3 Virtual filer ................................................................. 5-7
Setup information list................................................. 5-6 Virtual filer function list (compared with filer) ............ 5-8
Setups ....................................................................... 3-8 Virtual filer specific functions..................................... 5-9
Sharing nozzle changer data .........................2-34, 2-35 Virtual line ................................................................. 5-1
Shutdown ................................................................ 9-11 Virtual line creation and data simulation ................... 1-4
Side information ...................................................... 4-22 Virtual line setting procedure .................................... 5-3
Simulation ............................................................... 5-12 Virtual line setting window......................................... 5-2
Specific event display................................................ 3-7 Virtual line setup........................................................ 5-2
Speed Data ............................................................. 4-34 Virtual pins, and missing pin entry .......................... 4-24
Starting the configuration settings............................. 9-3
Starting the editor .................................................... 2-16 Z
Starting the event viewer........................................... 3-5
Starting the filer ......................................................... 2-2 Zigzag (1, 1) Ball ..................................................... 4-27
Starting the HTML help ............................................. 6-4 Zigzag (1, 1) No Ball ............................................... 4-27
Starting the line monitor ............................................ 3-2 Zigzag (1, 1) Parts No ............................................. 4-36
Starting the NT user manager ................................... 8-3 Zigzag (1, 1) Parts Yes............................................ 4-36
Starting the parts library editor ......................... 4-2, 4-11
Starting the production information viewer.............. 3-10
Starting the PT user manager ................................... 8-4
Starting the version display ....................................... 6-2
Starting the virtual filer............................................... 5-7
Starting the virtual line setup..................................... 5-2
Startup and exit ......................................................... 1-8
Status bar .................................................................. 6-3
Status of monitor and machine ................................. 3-2
Style ........................................................................ 4-18
Substitute parts ....................................................... 4-28
Supplementary explanation ...................................... 6-1
Supporting modules .................................................. 1-5
Switching the logic mode .......................................... 3-4
System version.......................................................... 6-3

9Q4C-E-PMD0Z-A01-00 Page 3
= MEMO =

Page 4 9Q4C-E-PMD0Z-A01-00
NOTICE
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Please recheck all items before confirming order.
 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
（Machine was manufactured by） Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. FA Division
441-13, Nagahasu, Tateishi-machi, Tosu-city, Saga, Japan
〒841-8585
Phone number: 81-942-84-2644
Fax number: 81-942-84-2636